SAN JOSE /EVERGREEN COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
SAN JOSE/EVERGREEN COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
San Jose, California
PROJECT MANUAL
VOLUME II
Bid Document G2010.0115
Ironworkers Training Center, #31126 San Jose City Community College
Dated: May 04, 2015
Architect: Artik Art & Architecture
Bids will be opened at 2:00 p.m., May 19, 2015, in the DISTRICT OFFICES MULTI- PURPOSE ROOM, 40 South Market St, San Jose, CA 95113
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROJECT # 31126
SAN JOSE CITY COLLEGE BLDG 200 ALTERATION IRONWORKERS TRAINING CENTER
2100 MOORPARK AVENUE SAN JOSE CA 95128
FENRUARY 18, 2015
SAN JOSE-EVERGREEN COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
40 SOUTH MARKET STREET SAN JOSE, CA 95113
Prepared by Architect: Artik Art & Architecture 394-A Umbarger Road San Jose, CA 95111 (408) 224-9890
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Signature Sheet
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS (Refer to Volume I)
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Refer to Volume I)
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19 Selective Demolition
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
03 30 53 Miscellaneous Cast-in-place Concrete
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
Not Used
DIVISION 05 – METALS
Not Used
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTIC, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 41 16 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets 06 46 00 Wood Trim
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE CONTROL
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 92 00 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 29 00 Gypsum Board
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 09 91 23 Interior Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 11 00 Visual Display Units 10 14 23 Panel Signage
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
Not Used
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 24 13 Roller Windows Shades
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Not Used
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
Not Used
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
Not Used
DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 00 00 Mechanical General Requirements 23 05 00 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports 23 05 53 Mechanical Identification 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 34 16 Welding Fume Exhaust System 23 34 23 Power Ventilators
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 Electrical General Requirements 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 26 05 23 Conductors and Cables
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes 26 05 53 Electrical Identification 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 22 00 Dry-Type Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 51 00 Lighting
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
27 00 00 Data/Telephone System
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
Not Used
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
Not Used
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
Not Used
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 SIGNATURE SHEET
FOR
SAN JOSE CITY COLLEGE BLDG 200 ALTERATION IRONWORKERS TRAINING CENTER
2100 Moorpark Avenue San Jose CA 95128
SAN JOSE-EVERGREEN COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
Project Number: #31126
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Section 01 35 16 "Alteration Project Procedures" for general protection and work procedures for alteration projects.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding.
B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.
B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.
C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
D. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.
E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation." 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least two hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.
B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove.
C. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.
D. Glazing: Carefully tool out glazing putty with a hand tool around panes of glass indicated to be removed to avoid damaging frames or adjacent glazing.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according to Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 02 41 19
PAGE 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SECTION 03 30 53 - MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready- mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. Comply with the following sections of ACI 301 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:
1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."
B. Comply with ACI 117.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Cementitious Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
2.4 CURING MATERIALS
A. Water: Potable.
2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Comply with ACI 301.
B. Normal-Weight Concrete:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floor slabs to exceed 3 percent.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Comply with ACI 301 for placing concrete.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
D. Equipment Bases and Foundations:
1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 6 inches high unless otherwise indicated; and extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor them into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface.
1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.
D. Slip-Resistive Broom Finish: Apply a slip-resistive finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot- weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.
D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:
a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 03 30 53
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Wood furring. 4. Wood sleepers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Power-driven fasteners. 2. Post-installed anchors. 3. Metal framing anchors.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring.
B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of the following species:
1. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
C. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of the following species and grades:
1. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
2.4 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.
H. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 2-by-4-inch nominal-size at 16 inches o.c.
END OF SECTION 06 10 53
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. 3. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B. Product Certificates: For the following:
1. Composite wood and agrifiber products.
C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI Certified Compliance Program certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Provide labels and certificates from WI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Abet Laminati Inc . b. Lamin-Art, Inc . c. Wilsonart LLC .
F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
H. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.
1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.
I. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. Colors:
a. One color for vertical faces. b. One color for countertops.
2. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal, and as follows:
1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.
B. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.
D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.
G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers. 2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated- steel ball-bearing slides. 3. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1. 4. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. 5. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD- 200.
H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. Olympus 888 housing with trim. Owner will provide and install Primus core.
I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. Olympus 777 housing with trim. Owner will provide and install Primus core.
J. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.
B. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
C. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed.
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 06 41 16
PAGE 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 46 00 WOOD TRIM
SECTION 06 46 00 - WOOD TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, and shims required for installing wood trim and concealed within other construction before wood trim installation.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver wood trim until operations that could damage wood trim have been completed in installation areas. If wood trim must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 46 00 WOOD TRIM
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood trim can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 5 to 10 percent.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.
B. Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 46 00 WOOD TRIM
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Interior Wood Trim for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B. Before installing architectural wood trim, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble wood trim and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches long except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with latex sealant, painted to match wall. 2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood trim. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop.
H. Refer to Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for final finishing of installed wood trim.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 06 46 00 WOOD TRIM
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective wood trim, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood trim. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean wood trim on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06 46 00
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION
SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION
1. CertainTeed Corporation .
2. Johns Manville .
3. Owens Corning .
4. Or equal.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class B (faced surface with a flame-propagation resistance of 0.12 W/sq. cm); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches , support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 5. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.
C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. . 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
3.5 INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation Type: Unfaced, glass-fiber blanket insulation.
1. Use at all interior walls for sound insulation.
B. Insulation Type: Faced, glass-fiber blanket insulation.
1. Use at all exterior walls and roof for thermal insulation.
END OF SECTION 07 21 00
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants. 3. Urethane joint sealants. 4. Immersible joint sealants. 5. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 6. Butyl joint sealants. 7. Latex joint sealants.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to provide labor and materials to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to provide labor and materials to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Low-Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
2.2 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248.
B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation ; 756 SMS.
b. GE Construction Sealants ; SilPruf NB.
c. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S. ; Bondaflex Sil 295 FPS NB.
d. Pecora Corporation ; 864NST.
e. Tremco Incorporated ; Spectrem 2.
f. Or equal.
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems ; Sonalastic TX1.
b. Bostik, Inc. ; Chem-Calk GPS1.
c. ER Systems, an ITW Company ; Pacific Polymers Elasto-Thane 230 MP.
d. Pecora Corporation ; Dynatrol I-XL.
e. Polymeric Systems, Inc. ; Flexiprene 1000.
f. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company ; Permathane SM7108.
g. Sika Corporation U.S. ; Sikaflex Textured Sealant.
h. Tremco Incorporated ; Dymonic.
i. Or equal.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
B. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
1. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems ; Sonolastic SL 1.
b. Pecora Corporation ; NR-201.
c. Polymeric Systems, Inc. ; Flexiprene 952.
d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; an ITW company ; Permathane SM7101.
e. Or equal.
C. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
1. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Bostik, Inc. ; Chem-Calk 555-SL.
b. LymTal International, Inc. ; Iso-Flex 880 GB.
c. Pecora Corporation ; Dynatrol II SG
d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The) ; Stampede-2SL.
e. Tremco Incorporated ; THC 900/901.
f. Or equal.
2.4 IMMERSIBLE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Immersible Joint Sealants. Suitable for immersion in liquids; ASTM C 1247, Class 1; tested in deionized water unless otherwise indicated
B. Urethane, Immersible, S, P, 25, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, NT, and I.
1. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Meadows, W. R., Inc. ; Pourthane SL.
b. Sika Corporation U.S. ; Sikaflex 1c SL.
c. Tremco Incorporated ; Vulkem 45.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
d. Or Equal.
2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS
A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.
B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation ; 786-M White.
b. GE Construction Sealants ; SCS1700 Sanitary.
c. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S. ; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF.
d. Soudal USA ; RTV GP.
e. Tremco Incorporated ; Tremsil 200.
f. Or equal.
2.6 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311.
1. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Bostik, Inc. ; Chem-Calk 300.
b. Pecora Corporation ; BC-158.
c. Or equal.
2.7 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems ; Sonolac.
b. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S. ; Bondaflex 600.
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
c. Pecora Corporation ; AC-20.
d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The) ; 850A.
e. Tremco Incorporated ; Tremflex 834.
f. Or equal.
2.8 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PAGE 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
PAGE 7 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
PAGE 8 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers. b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. c. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units. d. Joints in stone paving units, including steps. e. Tile control and expansion joints. f. Joints between different materials listed above. g. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 25, T. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to water immersion.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints in pedestrian plazas. b. Joints in swimming pool decks. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, immersible, S, P, 25, T, I. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Joints in dimension stone cladding. e. Joints in glass unit masonry assemblies. f. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems. g. Joints between metal panels. h. Joints between different materials listed above. i. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. j. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. k. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring. c. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring. d. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
PAGE 9 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry, concrete walls and partitions. d. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete beams and planks. e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
G. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
H. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Aluminum thresholds. b. Sill plates. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based.
PAGE 10 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
PAGE 11 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Hollow-metal doors and frames. 2. Added vision lites in existing hollow metal doors. 3. Added through door dropboxes.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
5. Details of accessories. 6. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
2.2 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3.
1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
2. Frames:
a. Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch . b. Construction: Face welded.
3. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.3 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
B. Maximum-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 4.
1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch , with minimum A40 coating. b. Construction: Face welded.
3. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.4 VISION LITES IN EXISTING HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Provide vision lite kits for installation in existing hollow metal doors.
1. Beveled Lite Frame – Low profile 20 gage galvannealed steel hemmed design with 1- 1/16 inch wide glazing pocket, mitered and welded corners, 37 degree beveled glass stops, primer finished for painting, PEMKO LT-B4G or equal. 2. Glazing: 1 inch thick glazing panels, with 1/4 inch clear tempered float glass on exterior lite and 1/4 inch tinted tempered float glass, PPG Solarban 70 or equal, on interior lite in sealed units. 3. Glazing Accessories: as required for weatherproof installation of frame and glazing.
2.5 THROUGH DOOR DROP BOX
A. Description: Metal locking drop box designed to be installed on the inside of a door with a chute through to the outside, PROTEX SAFE CO. MODEL WSS-159 THROUGH THE DOOR DROP BOX or equal.
1. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 15 inches high by 1-1/4 inches deep. 2. Drop Opening: 7-3/8 inches x 1-3/8 inches. 3. Cubic Inches: 313.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
4. Box Construction: Steel sheet metal with a piano hinge. 5. Locking Mechanism: Tubular Keys, minimum of two to be provided.
2.6 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, manufacturer’s standard welded to back of frames; 18 gauge minimum. 2. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
2.7 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches , as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow- metal work. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.
2.9 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
PAGE 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.
2. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 3. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation. 4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 5. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs at floor.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF VISION LITE KITS IN EXISTING HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Install vision lite frames and glazing per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Carefully cut opening in existing doors using precise methods. Opens shall be square, plumb and level. Do not overcut openings.
C. Install frame per manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply sealant behind exterior flanges during installation to provide a weatherproof condition. Removeable screws shall be to the inside.
D. Install glazing per manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. Clean and prepare frame for field painting.
PAGE 7 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
3.5 INSTALLATION OF THROUGH DOOR DROPBOX IN EXISTING HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Install dropbox per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Carefully cut opening in existing doors using precise methods. Opens shall be square, plumb and level. Do not overcut openings.
C. Install dropbox per manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply sealant behind exterior flanges during installation to provide a weatherproof condition. Removeable screws shall be to the inside.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08 11 13
PAGE 8 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
SECTION 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for aluminum windows.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.
C. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports, and calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation, and air infiltration. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: One year from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Basis-of-Design Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Torrance Aluminum 2000 Series Window at all the Units and Torrance Aluminum 2500 Series Window and Compensating Channel Sub Framing or comparable product by one of the following:
1. EFCO Corporation; a Pella company .
2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company .
3. Or equal.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows and sub frames from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:
1. Minimum Performance Class: AW100. 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 40.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings:
1. Fixed.
B. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
C. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
1. Kind: Fully tempered.
D. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190.
1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
a. Outdoor Lite: Gray tinted, PPG Solar Gray or equal. b. Indoor Lite: Clear. c. Kind: Fully tempered.
2. Lites: Two. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with air. 4. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface, PPG Solarban 70 or equal.
E. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.
F. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.
G. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.
H. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Subsills: Nonthermal, extruded-aluminum subsills in configurations indicated on Drawings.
B. Receptor System: Two-piece, snap-together, extruded-aluminum receptor system that anchors windows in place. Receptor must be mechanically fastened by screws and small joint sealer to
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
prevent leaking. Compensating channel that does mechanically fasten, but is installed in pieces in the field will not be accepted.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.
B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.
C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.
D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.
E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.
C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.
C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.
B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.
C. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08 51 13
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type required, in each finish specified, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Tag Samples with full description for coordination with the door hardware schedule. Submit Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of door hardware schedule.
1. Sample Size: Full-size units or minimum 2-by-4-inch Samples for sheet and 4-inch long Samples for other products.
C. Other Action Submittals:
1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. c. Content: Include the following information:
1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for door hardware. 7) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.
B. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware schedule.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.
E. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
F. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1 and California Building Code Chapter 11B.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf . 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees , the door will take a minimum of 5 seconds to move to a position 12 degrees from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.
C. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.
D. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to provide labor and materials to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.
2.2 HINGES
A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(IVE)
b. Or equal.
2.3 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch- thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches ; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete.
B. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(IVE)
b. Or equal.
2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:
1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1.25-inch bolt throw.
C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches , unless otherwise indicated.
D. Lock Trim:
1. Levers: Cast.
a. Schlage Rhodes.
2. Escutcheons (Roses): Cast. 3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. 4. Operating Device: Lever with escutcheons (roses).
E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(SCH)
2.5 AUXILIARY LOCKS
A. Bored Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5: Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(SCH)
B. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(SCH)
2.6 SURFACE BOLTS
A. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(IVE)
b. Or equal.
2.7 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS
A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch throw; designed for mortising into door edge. Where flush bolts occur in the accessible route of travel, provide accessible flush bolts.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(IVE)
b. Or equal.
2.8 AUTOMATIC AND SELF-LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS
A. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch throw; designed for mortising into door edge.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(IVE)
b. Or equal.
PAGE 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
2.9 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS
A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(VON)
b. Or equal.
2.10 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(SCH)
B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are interchangeable; face finished to match lockset.
C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.
2.11 OPERATING TRIM
A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following :
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(IVE)
b. Or equal.
2.12 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A. Astragals: BHMA A156.22.
2.13 SURFACE CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
PAGE 7 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(LCN)
b. Or equal.
2.14 CLOSER HOLDER RELEASE DEVICES
A. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A156.15; Grade 1; closer connected with separate or integral releasing and fire- or smoke-detecting devices. Door shall become self-closing on interruption of signal to release device. Automatic release is activated by smoke detection system.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(LCN)
b. Or equal.
2.15 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(IVE)
b. Or equal.
2.16 DOOR GASKETING
A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company .(PEM)
b. Or equal.
PAGE 8 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
2.17 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company .(PEM)
b. Or equal.
2.18 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company .(IVE)
b. Or equal.
2.19 FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.
B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Fire-Rated Applications:
a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:
1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames. 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames.
PAGE 9 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:
1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface-mounted exit devices.
3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 5. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
2.20 FINISHES
A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at 34” to 44” A.F.F. to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
PAGE 10 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI /SDI A250.8. 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.
E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Install within 4 inches of wall.
G. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
H. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
I. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
PAGE 11 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. HARDWARE GROUP NO. 1 – CLASSROOM TO CLASSROOM
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGES 112HD 628 IVE 1 EA VANDL OFFICE LOCK ND91TD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE BY OWNER 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN 1 EA KICKPLATE 8400 10” X 2” LDW B4E 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA WALL STOP/HOLDER WS45 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS S88D DKB PEM
B. HARDWARE GROUP NO. 2 – TO MECHANICAL SPACE
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGES 112HD 628 IVE 1 EA LOCKSET ND80TD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE BY OWNER 626 SCH 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
C. HARDWARE NOTES
1. Contractor to provide ten (10) Schlage Primus full sized interchangeable (IC) cores that will be keyed and installed by Owner. All locking hardware shall be compatible.
END OF SECTION 08 71 00
PAGE 12 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 80 00 GLAZING
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Glass for windows and doors. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 3. Spandrel panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in inches according to ASTM C 1036.
C. IBC: International Building Code.
D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.
C. Spandrel Panels: 12 inches square.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 80 00 GLAZING
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For glass.
B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
B. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 80 00 GLAZING
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.
1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings. b. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. c. Importance Factor: 1.0. d. Exposure Category: B.
C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 80 00 GLAZING
2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IgCC.
2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
2.5 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.
2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1. Applications: Glazing of monolithic glass into existing window frames.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 80 00 GLAZING
2.7 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 80 00 GLAZING
2.10 SPANDREL PANELS
A. Laminated Spandrel Panels: Laminated, metal-faced flat panels with no deviations in plane exceeding 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width or length.
1. Overall Panel Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Exterior Skin: Aluminum.
a. Finish: Clear anodized. b. Texture: Smooth.
3. Interior Skin: Aluminum.
a. Finish: Low-gloss, white baked enamel. b. Texture: Smooth.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.
PAGE 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 80 00 GLAZING
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
PAGE 7 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 80 00 GLAZING
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
PAGE 8 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 80 00 GLAZING
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
3.8 GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Interior Doors: Clear fully tempered float glass.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.
B. Exterior Doors: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4 inch. 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface, PPG Industries Solarban 70XL or equal. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 maximum. 11. Provide safety glazing labeling.
C. Windows: Low-e-coated, tinted glass.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface, PPG Industries Solarban 70XL or equal. 3. Tint: Grey 4. Visible Light Transmittance: 35 percent minimum. 5. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 6. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum. 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.25 maximum. 8. Provide safety glazing labeling.
PAGE 9 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 08 80 00 GLAZING END OF SECTION 08 80 00
PAGE 10 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For slip tracks, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 , hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: per Drawings. 3. Other Framed Openings: per Drawings.
E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 09 22 16
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. USG Corporation.
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch . 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1. Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. d. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
B. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 3. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non- drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09 29 00
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING
SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes modular carpet tile.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples.
1.4 IINFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd..
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.
C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Dimensional instability. c. Excess static discharge. d. Loss of tuft-bind strength. e. Loss of face fiber. f. Delamination.
3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide INTERFACE ENTRY LEVEL or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Or equal.
B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6, 100% solution dyed.
D. Pile Characteristic: Tufted textured loop pile.
E. Density: 6,720 oz./cu. yd.
F. Pile Thickness: 0.15 inch for finished carpet tile.
G. Stitches: 10 per inch.
H. Gage: 1/12 inch .
I. Surface Pile Weight: 28 oz./sq. yd.
J. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Fiberglass-reinforced PVC.
K. Backing System: GlasBac.
L. Size: 50cm x 50cm.
M. Applied Treatments:
1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: Intersept.
N. Performance Characteristics:
1. Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. 2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm (Class 1) according to NFPA 253. 3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf according to ASTM D 2646. 4. Dimensional Stability: 10 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). 5. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU (AATCC fading units) according to AATCC 16, Option E. 6. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.0 kV according to AATCC 134.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance.
B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure- sensitive adhesive.
C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING
D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 68 13
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
SECTION 09 91 23 – INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.
1. Concrete. 2. Steel. 3. Cast iron. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 6. Wood. 7. Gypsum board. 8. Plaster.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 8 Sections for factory priming and painting of windows and doors. 2. Division 9 Painting Sections for high-performance coatings. 3. Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. VOC content.
PAGE 1
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PAGE 2
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated or provide comparable products by one of the following:
1. Dunn Edwards 2. Kelly-Moore Paints. 3. Benjamin Moore Paints.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: Match Architect's samples.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
PAGE 3
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 4. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:
1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
G. Wood Substrates:
PAGE 4
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
H. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect.
2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
PAGE 5
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
E. Painting Behind Installed Casework: Primer and first coat of finish paint shall be applied ahead of the installation of casework and other wall mounted items. The remaining coats shall be applied after the wall mounted items have been installed.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. General: In the following schedules, products and manufacturers are used to establish a minimum level of performance, quality, and appearance. Equal products of other acceptable manufacturers may be used.
B. Concrete and Plaster Substrates, Non-traffic Surfaces:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, Dunn-Edwards Eff-Stop Select ESSL00. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, Dunn Edwards Spartawall SWLL30.
C. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Water-Based Clear Sealer System:
PAGE 6
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, PPG Industries, Plex-Seal 4- 6200. b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, PPG Industries, Plex-Seal 4- 6200.
D. Plaster Substrates:
1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkali resistant, water based, Dunn-Edwards Eff-Stop Select ESSL00. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, Dunn Edwards Spartawall SWLL30
E. Steel Substrates:
1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, Dunn-Edwards Bloc-Rust Premium BRPR00-1-WH. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, Dunn Edwards Spartawall SWLL30.
F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, Dunn-Edwards Ultra-Grip Premium UGPR00-1. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, Dunn Edwards Spartawall SWLL30.
G. Aluminum
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, Dunn-Edwards Ultra-Grip Premium UGPR00. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, Dunn Edwards Spartawall SWLL30.
H. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim, architectural woodwork and interior doors.
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, Dunn-Edwards Inter-Kote IKPR00. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, Dunn Edwards Spartawall SWLL30.
I. Fiberglass and Plastic Substrates:
1. Latex System:
PAGE 7
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, Dunn-Edwards Ultra-Grip Premium UGPR00. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, Dunn Edwards Spartawall SWLL30.
J. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, Dunn-Edwards Vinylastic Select VNSL00. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, Dunn Edwards Spartawall SWLL30.
K. Cotton or Canvas and ASJ Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings.
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, Dunn-Edwards. Ultra-Grip Premium UGPR00. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, Dunn Edwards Spartawall SWLL30.
L. Vinyl Wallcovering.
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, Dunn-Edwards Zinsser Shieldz Universal Wallcovering Primer b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, Dunn Edwards Spartawall SWLL30.
3.7 PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE
A. Welding Booth Area:
1. Wall Color: One color to match existing. 2. Trim Color: One color to match wall color.
B. Classroom:
1. Wall Color: One color to be selected by Architect. 2. Trim: One accent color to be selected by Architect.
C. Work Experience:
1. Wall Color: A pattern of three bright colors to be selected by Architect. 2. Trim: One accent color to be selected by Architect. 3. Ceiling: One color to be selected by Architect.
PAGE 8
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING END OF SECTION 09 91 23
PAGE 9
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
SECTION 10 11 00 – VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Visual display board assemblies (Markerboards) 2. Tackboard Panels
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units.
B. Product Schedule: For visual display units.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of tackboards.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece, provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to provide labor and materials to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.
2. Warranty Period: Life of the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2.2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY - MARKERBOARD
A. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated.
1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:
a. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
1) Visual Display Board Assembly: Factory fabricated. 2) Corners: Square. 3) Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4) Height: As indicated on Drawings. 5) Color: White. 6) Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard; continuous.
a) Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end closures.
7) Display Rail: Manufacturer's standard, extruded-aluminum display rail with plastic-impregnated-cork insert, end stops, designed to hold accessories.
a) Size: Full length of visual display unit.
8) Map Hooks and Clips: Two map hooks with flexible metal clips for every 48 inches (1200 mm)] of display rail or fraction thereof. 9) Flag Holder: One for each room. 10) Tackboard Insert Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 11) Aluminum Color: Match finish of visual display assembly trim.
2.3 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY - TACKBOARD
A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:
a. Platinum Visual Systems, a division of ABC Equipment, Inc.
B. Tackboard Panel: Vinyl-fabric-faced tackboard panel on core indicated.
1. Fabric Wrapped Edge: Wrap edge of tackboard panel with fabric facing. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: ASTM A 424, enameling-grade steel, uncoated thickness indicated; with exposed face and edges coated with primer, 1.7-to-2.5-mil- (0.043-to-0.064- mm-) thick ground coat, and color cover coat; and with concealed face coated with primer and 1.7-to-2.5-mil- (0.043-to-0.064-mm-) thick ground coat.
1. Gloss-Finish Cover Coat: Gloss as indicated; dry-erase markers wipe clean with dry cloth or standard eraser. Minimum 3.0-to-4.0-mil- (0.076-to-0.102-mm-) thick cover coat. Cover and ground coats shall be fused to steel at manufacturer's standard firing temperatures but not less than 1475 deg F (802 deg C).
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
B. Vinyl Fabric: Mildew resistant, washable, complying with FS CCC-W-408D, Type II; weighing not less than 13 oz./sq. yd. (440 g/sq. m); with surface-burning characteristics indicated.
1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:
a. Koroseal Interior Products Group
1) Pattern: Ceres 2) Color: Spruce and Hemp.
C. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208 cellulosic fiber insulating board.
D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.
E. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer.
1. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
F. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer for intended substrate.
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation of motorized, sliding visual display units.
C. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.
D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will be installed.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.
C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display units and wall surfaces.
D. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive visual display units and as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and visual display unit manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
B. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies to be mechanically attached: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of boards to walls.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.
END OF SECTION 10 11 00
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 10 14 23 SIGNAGE
SECTION 10 14 23 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Panel signs. 2. Room and Building identification signs, 3. Exit signage 4. General signage. 5. Restroom signage
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at least.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.
1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.
D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 10 14 23 SIGNAGE
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to provide labor and materials to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the California Building Code Chapter 11B for signs.
2.2 SIGNS
A. Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
B. Room and Building Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer face sheet with raised graphics laminated to acrylic backing sheet to produce composite sheet.
a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: 0.25 inch . b. Color(s): Match existing signs - Black Forest Green by Signs of Success Inc .
2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.
a. Edge Condition: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with countersunk flathead through fasteners. 4. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 10 14 23 SIGNAGE
2.3 PANEL-SIGN MATERIALS
A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).
B. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
1. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:
a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead screws and bolts with tamper-resistant slots unless otherwise indicated.
2. Sign Mounting Fasteners:
a. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, installed in predrilled holes.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Surface-Engraved Graphics: Machine engrave characters and other graphic devices into panel surface indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.
1. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 10 14 23 SIGNAGE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.
B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation.
B. Room-Identification Signs and Other Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls as indicated.
C. Mounting Methods:
1. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten.
D. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide opaque sheet matching sign material and finish onto opposite side of glass to conceal back of sign.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
B. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 10 14 23
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
SECTION 12 24 13 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 2. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.
1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark interior face of material if applicable.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material.
B. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Draper Inc . 2. Hunter Douglas Contract . 3. MechoShade Systems, Inc .
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.
1. Bead Chains: Nickel-plated metal.
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.
C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.
1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.
E. Shadebands:
1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.
F. Installation Accessories:
1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.
a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.
2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.
2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.
1. Source: Roller shade manufacturer. 2. Type: PVC-coated fiberglass. 3. Weave: Mesh. 4. Openness Factor: 3 percent. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
2.4 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.
B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:
1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible, except as follows:
1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances,and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 12 24 13
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE DIVISION 23 INDEX
SAN JOSE CITY COLLEGE BLDG 200 ALTERATION
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX
23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 34 16 WELDING FUME EXHAUST SYSTEM 23 34 23 POWER VENTILATORS
L:\2014\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Mechanical\23 m-index.doc
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23 00 00
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to the Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 General Requirements. B. This Section 23 00 00, applies specifically to all other Sections of Division 22 and Division 23. C. Where requirements of this Section exceed those in other contract documents, Contractor shall comply with the requirements of this Section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, apparatus and materials that are required to provide a complete installation as indicated on the drawings and in the specifications, including that reasonably inferred for proper execution of this Division. B. Provide cutting and patching as required for execution of work performed under this Division and not provided under other sections. C. Repair or replace any damage to work of this Division, damage caused by leaks or breaks in systems of this Division, and damage caused by work of this Division including that to landscaping, paving or other items which are to remain in use. D. Trim not specifically indicated but required for proper functioning of equipment shall be furnished and installed by the craft furnishing the equipment. E. Coordinate all utility requirements for equipment furnished by the mechanical sections of this division. Rough-in required systems and make final connections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Above Grade: Not buried in ground and not embedded in concrete slab on ground. B. Below Grade: Buried in ground or embedded in concrete slab on ground. C. Concealed: Inside building, above grade and located within walls, furred spaces, crawl spaces, attics, above suspended ceilings, etc. In general any item not visible or directly accessible. D. Connect: Complete hookup of item with required services. E. Contractor: Mechanical Contractor unless stated otherwise.
Page 1
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
F. Exposed: Either visible or subject to mechanical or weather damage, indoors or outdoors, including areas such as mechanical and storage rooms. In general any item that is directly accessible without removing panels, walls, ceilings or other parts of structure. G. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to job site in new condition. H. Install: Place, secure and connect as required to make fully operational. I. Provide: Furnish and install as defined above; perform work. J. Rough-in: Provide all indicated services in the necessary arrangement for making final connections to fixture or equipment. K. Indoor: Enclosed within building structure, crawl spaces, etc. L. Use (verb): Furnish and install as defined above. M. Outdoor: Outside of building structure.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS A. Abbreviations contained in various sections of the specifications and drawings refer to the following organizations, societies, associations standards, publications, terms, etc.: AABC: Associated Air Balance Council AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI: American National Standards Institute, Inc. ARI: Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials AWS: American Welding Society AWWA: American Water Works Association NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEMA: National Electric Manufacturers Association NFPA: National Fire Protection Association OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. UL: Underwriters' Laboratories B. Other abbreviations and symbols are scheduled on the drawings.
1.5 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to install all work to meet or exceed minimum requirements stipulated in current issues of applicable standards, codes, or regulations. Where drawings or specifications prescribe requirements exceeding those minimums, the work shall be installed in accordance with the drawing or specification requirements. Particular attention is directed to the following. This list does not include all standards, codes, and regulations which may be applicable; other Federal, State, and local regulations may apply.
Page 2
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 2. State Fire Marshal and Local Fire Marshal. 3. Local Building, Mechanical, Plumbing, & Fire Codes, all volumes. 4. National Fire Codes published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 5. Factory Mutual Insurers. 6. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - Guide Lines for Seismic Restraints for Mechanical Systems. 7. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO) 8. California Building Code (CBC), California Plumbing Code (CPC), California Mechanical Code, California Electrical Code (CEC), and California Fire Code (CFC). 9. Division of State Architects (DSA). 10. Any other applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations. 11. Do not construct anything in these drawings and specifications to permit work not conforming to these requirements. The regulations shall govern where they require higher standards or are violated by the drawings and specifications. Consider rulings and interpretations of the enforcing agencies as part of these specifications. Comply with the drawings and specifications showing work exceeding minimum code requirements. B. All regulations and standards shall be the latest issued unless the governing authority requires the use of an earlier issue. Provide all work required by the governing authority, even if it is not indicated on drawings or in the specifications, at no additional cost or time to the project.
1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Consider all drawings and all divisions of these specifications as a whole and provide work of this section as shown anywhere therein. Absolute accuracy of the drawings and specifications cannot be guaranteed. While every effort has been made to coordinate the locations of equipment covered under other sections or divisions of these specifications, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate exact requirements governed by actual job conditions. Check all information and report any discrepancies before submitting bid or fabricating work. B. Report discrepancies in time to avoid unnecessary work, and make changes as directed by the Architect. Do not make any changes or additions that are subject to additional compensation without written authorization, based upon an agreed price. Any changes made without the above mentioned authorization shall be at Contractor's own risk and expense. Follow manufacturers' directions where they cover points not specifically indicated; however, if they are in conflict with these drawings and specifications, obtain clarifications from the Architect before starting work.
Page 3
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.7 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES A. Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. C. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring products and finishes to original and/or specified condition. D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. E. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. F. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect/Engineer. G. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. H. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product Sections.
1.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Refer to Division 1 section “Cutting and Patching”.
1.9 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for proper operation of all systems, minor subsystems, and services provided under this section. He shall coordinate startup and commissioning procedures, meetings, calibration, and system checkout with all subcontractors and trades involved. Any system operational problems shall be diagnosed and all correctional procedures shall be initiated with the various subcontractors as required to bring the system into compliance with the design intent. B. Start and operate all systems. Provide the services of factory trained technicians for startup of major equipment and systems including, but not limited to, chillers, air conditioning units variable frequency drives (VFD), temperature controls, pumps, boilers, etc. C. Ensure all control systems are calibrated and functioning properly. Prepare a log to indicate the check, calibration, set point, etc. of each control device. D. Functional performance tests verify that components, equipment, systems, and interfaces between systems operate correctly. They include operating modes, interlocks, control sequences, and responses to emergency conditions.
Page 4
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
E. Functional performance testing and verification may be achieved by direct manipulation of system inputs (i.e. heating or cooling sensors), manipulation of system inputs by building automation system (i.e. softwar4e override of sensor inputs), trend logs of system inputs and outputs using building automation system, or short term monitoring of system inputs and outputs using stand-alone data loggers. F. If retesting is necessary because any equipment or system reported to have been successfully started up or pre-functionally tested is found during functional testing to be faulty, the additional cost of retest shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
1.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two (2) weeks prior to date of Training. B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at designated location. D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. E. The amount of time required for training on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual sections, or as noted below: HVAC Equipment and Systems 2 hours
1.11 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Mechanical Contractor will appoint and employ services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting and balancing.
1.12 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Refer to Division 01 section “Closeout Procedures”. B. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's inspection. C. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities.
1.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Refer to Division 01 section “Closeout Procedures”. B. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
Page 5
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
C. Clean interior and exterior of all equipment; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum and clean all dust from air distribution system including ductwork and grilles. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. E. Replace filters of operating equipment. F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
1.14 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish main floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. B. Delete Architect/Engineer title block and seal from all documents. C. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer.
1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Refer to Division 01 section “Operation and Maintenance Data”.
1.16 WARRANTIES A. Refer to Division 01 section “Operation and Maintenance Data”. B. Provide duplicate notarized copies. C. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. D. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three (3) D side ring binders with durable plastic cover. E. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. F. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.
1.17 BUILDING CONTROL BOOKS A. Refer to Division 01 section “Operation and Maintenance Data”.
Page 6
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B. At the time Operation and Maintenance Data are submitted as specified, submit 3 loose, but bundled, sets of Building Control Information on 3 hole punched 8- 1/2”X11” paper. The Building Control Information shall be organized as follows: 1. Table of contents with appropriate division tabs. 2. Contractors (Name, Address, Telephone and Contact). 3. Sub-Contractors (Name, Address, Telephone and Contact). 4. Material Suppliers (Name, Address, Telephone and Contact). 5. Warranties (Cards and Information Including Start Date, Duration, Company Name, Address, Telephone and Contact).
1.18 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
1.19 SITE VISIT A. Visit the site before submitting a bid. No extra payment will be made for additional work that would have been made apparent by the site visit.
1.20 OBSERVATION BY ARCHITECT A. Work may be observed at any time by the Architect or his representative. Work covered or concealed before being observed and accepted shall be opened and uncovered upon request, and replaced at no additional cost or time to the project.
1.21 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING SERVICES AND UTILITIES A. Coordinate with other Sections and schedule sequence of accomplishing the work covered by this division in such a manner as not to interrupt existing services and utilities at a time that will inconvenience the Owner.
1.22 FEES A. Secure and pay fees for permits, licenses, inspections and royalties required for work of this Section.
1.23 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Refer to Division 01 section “Submittal Procedures”. B. General: 1. In addition to the procedures indicated below follow the procedures specified in Division 1 where they exceed the requirements of this section. 2. Provide submittals of material or equipment in accordance with each specification section.
Page 7
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3. Each item submitted shall be labeled or identified the same as on the drawings. (EF1, etc.) C. Equipment, materials, and products specifically identified, described, and scheduled on the drawings are the basis of design. The other manufacturers or suppliers which may be named in the specification only indicate the general acceptability of the manufacturer or supplier and are considered alternates. It is the Contractor's responsibility to research, select, and prove, through the submittal process, that the specific model, size, or type of the alternate proposed manufacturer is equal and will perform equal to that which is the basis of the design. Operational characteristics for such items as outlet velocities, power input, sound levels, efficiencies, etc., shall be considered in addition to the overall performance, output, and physical constraints. D. The Contractor assumes full responsibility that alternative items substituted for the scheduled manufacturer will meet the job requirements and is responsible for the cost of redesign and modifications necessary due to this substitution, for all trades. Revisions or additional work required by any trade due to the use of substitute materials and equipment shall be fully indicated on detailed drawings submitted with the shop drawings and all additional costs shall be accounted for in the final proposed substitution. E. Mark submittal "Exactly as Specified" or accompanied by a letter from the supplier explaining in detail what differences, if any, exist between the submitted item and the scheduled item. Failure to point out the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not indicated and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, the Contractor will still remain responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the specifications. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the individual specification sections, provide materials and equipment from the indicated manufacturers only. Submittals of material or equipment manufactured by other than those indicated may be returned, not reviewed. If no manufacturers are indicated, then any product or material which complies with the specification and for the intended application may be submitted. G. The mechanical and electrical components, structural systems, service clearances, and controls for all equipment are selected and sized, based on the basis of design manufacturer and equipment scheduled. If substitutions and/or equivalent alternate equipment are furnished, it shall be the responsibility of all parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent alternate equipment to verify and compare the characteristics (capacity, size, clearance, acoustics, etc.) and requirements of that submitted to that scheduled. If greater capacity or more materials or labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then it shall be the responsibility of the parties involved in providing the substitute and/or equivalent items of equipment to provide all compensation for additional charges made for the proper rough-in, circuitry, support, and connections for the equipment furnished for all trades affected. No additional charges shall be allowed for such revisions.
Page 8
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
H. Allow two weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. I. The Engineer and/or Architect will review submitted shop drawings and documents for general conformance with the design concept of the project and the information contained in the contract documents. The Engineer's and/or Architect's review is for the convenience of the Owner in following the work and does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of deviations from the requirements stated in this specification and contract documents. J. The Engineer's and/or Architect's review shall not be construed as a complete or detailed check of the work submitted, nor shall it relieve the Manufacturer or Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions of any sort in the shop drawings and samples, or from the necessity of furnishing any work required by the contract documents. The review of a separate item shall not indicate review of the complete assembly in which it functions. Nothing in the Engineer's and/or Architect's review of the shop drawings and samples shall be considered as authorizing 1) a departure from contract documents and specifications, or 2) additional cost to the owner, or 3) increased time for completion of the work. K. Submittals are not reviewed for quantities, dimensions, weights, fabrication processes, construction methods, coordination with work of other trades, construction safety practices, service clearance, coil and motor location, location of control and electrical panels, and other layout constraints. These items shall remain the sole responsibility of the contractor. L. The Engineer and/or Architect will review submittals with reasonable promptness and will return them to the Vendor/Supplier/Manufacturer stamped to indicate the appropriate action taken as follows: A. No Exceptions Taken. B. Exceptions Taken As Noted. No resubmittal required. C. Exceptions As Noted. Resubmit. D. Rejected. Resubmit. E. Not Reviewed. Must Meet Plans, Specifications, and Codes. M. Markings or comments or the lack thereof shall not be construed as relieving the Vendor/Supplier/Manufacturer/Contractor from complete compliance with the project drawings and specifications. N. No part of the work shall be started in the shop or in the field until the Engineer and/or Architect have reviewed the shop drawings and samples for that respective portion of the work. Shop drawings and samples shall be submitted for review sufficiently in advance of the scheduled start of the work in the shop or in the field to allow ample time, in consideration of the number and complexity of the drawings in the submittal, for the Engineer and/or Architect to make an orderly review. No extension of time to complete the work will be granted to the Vendor/Supplier/Manufacturer by reason of failure to perform in this respect.
Page 9
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
O. Each shop drawing and sample submitted for review shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal, and shall be identified by the project title, Vendor's/Supplier's/Manufacturer's name, and a reference to the related part of the contract documents. P. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons.
1.24 ESTABLISHED STANDARD MANUFACTURER / OTHER ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Division 01 section “Project Requirements and Substitutions”.
1.25 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.
1.26 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
1.27 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
Page 10
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Provide mixing with foreign matter. F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
1.28 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to “Submittal Procedures” above and Division-1for additional requirements. B. Submit information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. C. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings and directions, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings, and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorages. Include as a minimum the following information on drawings or diagrams: 1. Dimensions 2. Identification of products and materials included 3. Compliance with specified standards 4. Notation of coordination requirements 5. Allowance for expansion, contraction, and deflection/movement of support structures. D. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement E. Clearances for access and service F. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. G. Upon contractor’s request, engineer can make electronic data files available at contractor’s expense in order to enable contractor to expedite the production of working/coordination/shop drawings for the project. Transfer of the electronic data files to Contractor is for informational purposes only and will only be completed after a waiver is signed by contractor and owner relieving engineer of all liability resulting from use of electronic files and all engineer costs to produce electronic files in a format suitable for distribution are paid by contractor.
1.29 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Place materials and equipment on order in time to avoid job delay or hindrance. Schedule deliveries to coincide, as nearly as possible, with the construction schedule.
Page 11
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B. Use only new, unused materials and equipment unless specifically noted otherwise. C. All materials and equipment not conforming to the requirements of these specifications will be considered as defective. Items which have been accepted or approved at one time and place, but which subsequently fail to conform to the requirements of these specifications will also be considered as defective. All such defective materials, whether in place or not, will be rejected. Remove such materials and equipment immediately from the site of the work. D. Prior to ordering materials or starting work, verify all measurements at the site. No extra compensation will be allowed for differences between actual dimensions and the measurements shown on the drawings. E. Except as specifically noted otherwise, follow the installation and/or maintenance directions provided by the manufacturer for all materials and equipment. F. For each part of the work furnish all materials and equipment of the same type by the same manufacturer.
1.30 PROTECTION OF BUILDING A. Protect new and existing building structures and adjacent finished surfaces during construction. Patch, repair, and refinish existing work damaged by work under this Division to match adjacent undisturbed areas. Patching, repair, and refinishing is to be performed by workmen skilled in the Sections involved.
1.31 QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, contractor shall request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
1.32 SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER AND MODEL A. Trade names are used to establish standards. Where more than one name is given, the first listed is the basis of the project design and will be described fully. Other names indicate product lines of generally comparable quality but are subject to the Architect's/Engineer’s direction.
Page 12
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B. Where specifications call for an installation to be made in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, a copy of such recommendations shall at all times be kept in the job superintendent's office, and shall be available to the Owner's representative. C. Follow manufacturer's instructions where they cover points not specifically indicated on the drawings and specifications. If they are in conflict with the drawings and specifications obtain clarification from the Architect before starting work.
1.33 NO SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER A. Where no specific make of material or equipment is mentioned, an appropriate product of approved manufacturer may be used, provided it conforms to the requirements of system.
1.34 U.L. LABEL A. Furnish UL labeled and listed materials and equipment except when equipment is of a type for which labeling or listing services are not available from UL.
1.35 CURRENT MODELS A. Materials and equipment shall be new, current models by each manufacturer and shall bear complete identification by the manufacturer. Materials and equipment shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to equal or exceed specified, submitted and published specifications, such as pressure ratings, capacities, etc. 1.36 SERVICE CAPABILITY A. Provide materials and equipment of major and reputable manufacturers with ability to render competent and thorough technical services through local organizations, and to expeditiously furnish spare parts.
1.37 FINISHES AND PAINTING A. Provide all equipment with a factory painted finish. All other painting will be done per the Architect's direction. B. Touchup scratches in factory finished surfaces to match original. Obtain touch-up paint from the manufacturer of the piece of equipment.
1.38 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with work performed by other sections/divisions in order to accommodate the requirements of this section and to ensure adequate space and proper location for all necessary work on this project whether or not work is under this section. Provide coordination drawings, as indicated. Coordination shall be done prior to order or manufacture of any systems or components. B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations. C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured- in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
Page 13
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
D. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. E. Coordinate work with the Electrical Division. Furnish the Electrical Division with shop drawing information for indicating ratings and control circuits required for the actual equipment furnished. Coordinate voltage, phase, and load requirements, prior to ordering equipment, to insure mechanical and electrical matches. All equipment shall be provided and ordered to suit the power available. F. Layout support pads, curbs, sleepers, anchor bolts, etc., for all mechanical equipment and materials so as to be in the proper location for the equipment actually ordered. These pads shall be of adequate dimension to provide for proper mounting of equipment isolators and equipment mounting so that anchor bolts meet all seismic criteria. Contractor shall allow for proper service clearances. G. Provide templates, information, and instructions to other divisions as necessary to properly locate holes and openings to be cut or provided for mechanical work. H. Layout ducts, piping, and other mechanical systems and confirm all sizes of systems and components to be sure they fit the space available prior to ordering and manufacturing of components. Be certain to allow for proper pipe slopes. I. Provide proper clearances for access to and service of all equipment and items requiring adjustment including shutoff valves. J. Coordinate all disciplines to insure maximum point loads that can be attached to structural members are not exceeded. See other sections and structural contract documents for requirements. Provide intermediate supports between existing structural members (Unistrut, angle, etc.) as necessary to not exceed maximum point loads. K. Lay out trench locations, do all excavation, shoring, laying, backfilling, and compacting for work performed under this division and not provided under other divisions. See other divisions for specification requirements.
1.39 STRUCTURAL MODIFICATION A. Do not cut structural members except with written approval of the Architect.
1.40 WORKMANSHIP A. Workmanship shall be first class throughout, performed only by competent and experienced workmen in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. Replace work falling below these standards as directed by the Architect. Constant supervision of the work either by the Contractor or his competent representative shall be maintained. Welding shall be done by certified pipe welders.
1.41 QUIETNESS A. Quietness during construction is a requirement. Eliminate noise, other than that caused by specific equipment operating at optimum conditions as directed by the Architect.
Page 14
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.42 GENERAL ELECTRICAL A. All equipment shall be selected to suit power available; this requirement supersedes other portions of the specifications. B. All equipment shall conform to the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards, and shall bear the Underwriter Laboratories label unless such listing is not available. C. Load and line voltage connections to equipment will be made by the Electrical Division unless specifically noted otherwise. Coordinate work with the Electrical Division. Furnish the Electrical Division with shop drawing information for indicating ratings and control circuits required for the actual equipment furnished. D. Guard opening giving access to "live" or rotating parts to prevent accidental contact with such parts.
1.43 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers’ printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers’ instructions and Contract Documents. C. Follow Manufacturer's installation details except as specifically modified on the drawings, and provide any valves or special fittings or other specialty items called for by them as required in order to make the equipment perform as intended.
1.44 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers’ certificate to Architect/Engineer for review, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
1.45 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General: All equipment, piping, ductwork, and materials shall be fastened to the structure with properly sized and structurally engineered anchors, bolts, and restraints to prevent permanent displacement in any direction caused by lateral motion, overturning, or uplift. 1. Piping and ductwork systems shall be bracedto resist the forces prescribed in ASCE 7-05 section 13.3 as defined in ASCE 7-05 section 13.6.8, 13.6.7, 13.6.5.5 item 6, and CBC 1614A.1.13.
Page 15
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2. Submit drawings, calculations, and specifications that clearly indicate the furnished systems for support of equipment, piping, ductwork and materials. The bracing and attachment to the structure shall comply with one of the OSHPD pre approvals with an OPA #, such as Mason Industries (OPA 349), or ISAT (OPA 485) as modified to satisfy anchorage requirements of ACI 318, appendix D. B. Calculations: 1. Submit drawings, calculations, and specifications that clearly indicate the furnished systems for support of equipment, piping, ductwork and materials. 2. Calculations shall be in a form that can be readily reviewed by the Owner, and shall be prepared, stamped and signed by a licensed Structural Engineer. 3. Calculations for all seismic restraints including standard NFPA approved restraints shall indicate how the restraints are adequately supported by the secured to the building structure. C. Provide specifications of anchor bolt size and loads with installation instructions for each item. D. All structural steel shall be ASTM A36 (Fy = 36,000 psi). All pipe steel shall be ASTM A501 (Fy = 36,000) or ASTM A53, type E or S, grade B (Fy = 35,000). All tubular steel shall be ASTM A500 grade B (Fy = 46,000 psi). All bolts shall be ASTM A307 or ASTM A325. Other ASTM specified materials to be used in the unit and support shall be submitted for approval. Latest American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) and American Welding Society (AWS) codes shall apply. E. All bolts, anchor bolts, expansion bolts, etc., shall be installed with steel washers. All high strength bolting shall be inspected by an independent testing laboratory. All welding shall be by welders holding valid certificates and have current experience in type of welds performed. Certificates shall be those issued by an accepted testing agency. F. All welding shall be done by E70 series low hydrogen rods. All welding shall be per American Welding Society standards. Vendor may shop weld only the portions of unit and support which is factory preassembled. All field connections shall be bolted. Shop welds shall be shown on shop drawings. All full penetration welds shall be tested and certified by an independent testing laboratory. G. Expansion Anchors in Hardened Concrete: 1. An expansion anchor is defined as a mechanical fastener designed to expand in a self-drilled or predrilled hole of a specified size, and to engage the sides of the hole in one or more locations to develop shear and/or withdrawal resistance to applied loads without the use of grout, epoxy, or dry pack.
Page 16
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2. Maximum Values: The shear and tension (pull-out) loads shall not exceed the values allowed in the latest International Code Council (ICC) Evaluation Report for the specific anchor in hard rock 3000 psi concrete. 3. Where the anchors are subjected to combined shear and pull-out forces, the ratio of the actual shear to the allowable shear, plus the ratio of the actual pull-out to the allowable pull-out, shall not exceed 1.00 for gravity loads or seismic forces. 4. Expansion anchors shall be specified in calculations and drawings by Manufacturer's name and model number, as well as by nominal thread size and required embedment. They shall be sized and installed in accordance with the above referenced conditions and requirements, as well as Manufacturer's recommendations, and ICC Evaluation Report recommendations for the specific anchor. H. All isolators shall be fastened to the structure and to the equipment with properly sized and structurally engineered anchors and bolts as specified above. The isolator Manufacturers shall submit seismic calculations confirming that such bolts and anchors can handle the specified seismic requirements. I. The equipment Manufacturer shall furnish the weight of the equipment at each point of support. J. The SMACNA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems" may be used for reference. K. Seismic Bracing for Hangers and Duct: All required seismic bracing shall be installed as per the State of California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Division T- 22 modified to meet an importance factor (I) of 1.0. L. Under California Code of Regulations Title 24, Division T-22, seismic restraints may be omitted from the following installation: 1. Gas piping less than 1" inside diameter. 2. Piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less than 1 1/4" inside diameter. 3. All other piping less than 2 1/2" inside diameter. 4. All piping suspended by individual hangers 12" or less in length from the top of pipe to the bottom of the support for the hanger. 5. All rectangular air handling ducts less than 6 square feet in cross sectional area. 6. All round air handling ducts less than 28" in diameter. 7. All ducts suspended by hangers 12" or less in length from the top of the duct to the bottom of the support or the hanger connection point. The Title 24 Division T-22 allowable omissions do not supersede any requirements indicated in NFPA or required by the Fire Marshal or building official. Contractor shall comply to the most stringent of these requirements.
Page 17
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
M. Provide for attachment to portions of the building structure capable of bearing the loads imposed. Design systems to not overstress the building structure. N. The Construction Manager shall coordinate the load requirements from all contractors so that no combination of loads exceeds the structural limitations. O. Design and install all support systems to comply with the seismic zone 4 requirements of the California Building Code (CBC). Use an importance factor (I) of 1.0. P. The Engineer (under Contract of the Mechanical Contractor) providing the required calculations shall inspect all supports and attachments designed by him and provide a letter certifying that they have been installed as designed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Refer to Subsequent Sections)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation and Arrangement: Install all mechanical work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchange bundles, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, raceways and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, traps, starters, motors, and control components. Doors and access panels shall be kept clear. C. Access: Provide access panels in equipment, ducts, as required for inspection and for proper maintenance. D. Location of pipes, ducts, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be adjusted to accommodate the work and to avoid interferences anticipated or encountered. Determine the exact route and location of each pipe and duct prior to fabrication. 1. Right-of-Way: Lines which pitch shall have the right-of-way over those which do not pitch. For example, steam, condensate and plumbing drains shall normally have the right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have the right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed. 2. Offsets, transitions and changes in directions in pipes and ducts shall be made to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., required to affect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. E. Location of valves, traps, strainers, motors, damper operators, etc., shall be such as to be easily accessible by a person standing on the floor. If any such items are not in the open they shall be accessible through access openings in the building construction. Valves in vertical risers shall be located not over 5 feet above the floor. If circumstances at a particular location make this accessibility difficult or inconvenient, the situation shall be discussed with the Architect before installing apparatus at reduced accessibility locations.
Page 18
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
F. Manufacturers' Installation Details: Conform to manufacturer’s instructions. Provide any valves or fittings recommended by manufacturers. G. Openings in Pipes and Ducts: Keep closed during construction. H. Ferrous metal work exposed to the weather, other than cast iron, shall be hot dip galvanized. I. Nameplates: Provide for each piece of equipment per the equipment schedules and its associated motor controller (if not in a motor control center); including any special instructions for fan or pump use; laminated black and white plastic with lettering cut through to white background. Submit list to the Architect for prior approval.
3.2 TESTING A. Test Procedures and Reports: The Contractor shall notify the Architect at least 48 hours before each system test, for mechanical work. Qualifications of people running tests should be established in writing. Monitor all tests. A written report shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Architect, showing the following as a minimum. 1. Who conducted test. 2. Test plan - times, pressures, etc. 3. Test results - times, pressures, a part of system that failed to meet test minimum and why. Corrective action recommended.
END OF SECTION 23 00 00
L:\2014\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Mechanical\230000.doc
Page 19
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 23 05 00
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Sleeves. 2. Escutcheons. 3. Welding Exhaust System Components 4. Ductwork 5. Split System Heat Pumps 5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 6. Painting and finishing. 7. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Mechanical sleeve seals 2. Escutcheons 3. Welding Exhaust System Components 4. Ductwork 5. Split System Heat Pumps
Page 1
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." B. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified at no additional cost to the Owner. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in- place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate and provide the access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Coordinate with construction manager for Access panels, doors and requirements from other trades.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
2.2 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
Page 2
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.3 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. 1. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish. 2. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: Polished chrome plated with set screw.
2.4 WELDING EXHAUST SYSTEM COMPONENTS (Lincoln Electric, or approved equal) A. Extraction Arm: Telescopic extraction arm extends 5’ to 8’ and features a pivoting motion. The hood shall rotate a full 360˚.
2.5 DUCTWORK
A. Construct and install all sheet metal ductwork in accordance with the most stringent requirements of the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA recommendations and Uniform Me- chanical Code. 1. Install welding exhaust duct utilizing the requirements for 10” ESP construction.
B. Seal airtight all supply, return and exhaust ducts on all joints and seams with canvas and Arabol, hard cast or approved duct sealer. At the contractor’s option, Ductmate, or equal Elgen Manufacturing flanges, may be used.
C. Ductwork shall be round or rectangular with round or rectangular duct branches.
D. Provide a blast gate damper at each branch duct. The blast gate shall be a cast alumi- num full gate damper as manufactured by Spiral Manufacturing Company, or approved equal.
D. Provide flexible connection at inlet and outlet of each fan or vibration mounted unit. Connection shall be weatherproof where exposed to weather.
E. The centerline radius of all bends shall be 1½ times the diameter of the duct.
F. Should structural conditions or other work such as conduits, lights, etc., prevent the in- stallation of ducts or the setting of equipment at the points indicated on the drawings, changes as authorized by the Architect shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. Install ductwork parallel to building surfaces with a minimum of fittings.
Page 3
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
G. Close ends of duct immediately after installation. Leave closure in place until removal is necessary for completion of the installation.
H. Install all ductwork so that equipment can be removed and/or serviced with a minimum of duct dislocation. All fittings, etc., shall be readily accessible.
I. Size any section of duct for which the size is not indicated, or any intermediate section erroneously shown undersized, the same size as the largest duct connecting to it. Sizes listed are nominal.
J. Cut ductwork accurately to job measurements and install without springing or forcing, true to line and grade, generally square with building and adequately supported to pre- vent sagging or undue stress on duct, fittings and accessories.
2.6 SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS
A. Indoor Units
The indoor unit shall be factory assembled and wired. The casing shall have a white finish. The evaporator fan shall be an assembly with line flow fans direct driven by a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on perma- nently lubricated bearings. An adjustable guide vane shall be provided with the ability to change the air flow from horizontal to vertical. A motorized air sweep flow louver shall provide an automatic change in air flow by directing the air from side to side for uniform air distribution. Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable washable filter. The evaporator coil shall be on nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins bonded to copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high effi- ciency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phoscopper or silver alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 v / 1ø.
B. Outdoor Units
1. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel. 2. The unit shall be provided with a direct drive propeller type fan arranged for hori- zontal discharge. The motors shall be permanently lubricated type resiliently mounted to the frame for quiet operation. The fans shall be protected by a fan guard. 3. The compressor shall be high performance rotary type with the capability to op- erate with a maximum height difference of 130’ and an overall refrigerant tubing length between indoor and outdoor units of 130’ without linesize changes, traps or additional oil.
2.7 FILTER BANK FILTRATION SYSTEM
Page 4
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
A. Statiflex Filter Bank filtration system with MERV 16 rated filter cartridges capable of ex- tracting minimum 99.5% of particulate 0.3 to 1.0 microns in size.
B. An electronic control system monitors airflow rates across the filters and automatically signals a cleaning pulse when an increased pressure drop is detected. The self cleaning shall take place during off hours when the exhaust fan is de-energized.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calcu- late friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are accepted on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifi- cally indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel remov- al.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
Page 5
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep- pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome- plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One- piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One- piece, stamped-steel type. f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast- brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type and set screw. h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw. l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor- plate type. M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable plain-end sleeves. O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas minimum 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum- board partitions.
Page 6
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to minimum 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. (1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials. T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
Page 7
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule- number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix. I. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. J. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. K. Plain-End Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. L. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Page 8
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.4 GROUTING A. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for grouting information and requirements. B. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. C. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. D. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. E. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. F. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. G. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. H. Place grout around anchors. I. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
60
Page 9
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. D. Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details.
Page 1
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators. D. All attachments to building structure shall be made in accordance with the Owners structural engineers requirements and weight limitations. E. Submit shop drawings and calculations for review and approval by Owners structural engineer before installation.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for equipment, duct and pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State of California. 1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Pipe Hangers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. c. Grinnell Corp. d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. e. National Pipe Hanger Corp. f. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
Page 2
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
2. Channel Support Systems: a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit. c. GS Metals Corp. d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. e. National Pipe Hanger Corp. f. Unistrut Corp. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. c. Pipe Shields, Inc. d. e. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems: a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp. b. Hilti, Inc. c. ITW Ramset/Red Head. d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types. 1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield. 1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water- repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
Page 3
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
2. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier. 3. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier. 4. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water- repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. 5. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass. 6. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. 7. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. 8. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 9. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 4. Refer to Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for additional information and requirements”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.
Page 4
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections. C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non- insulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required. 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non- insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2. 10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
Page 5
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. 20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary. 21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape where allowed by seismic codes.
Page 6
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles where allowed by seismic codes. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge where allowed by structural codes. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams where allowed by structural codes. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where head room is limited. G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density, 100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water- repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360- degree sheet metal shield.
Page 7
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems. 1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.
Page 8
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1. D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded. K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal- hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Page 9
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment as indicated on the drawings.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
Page 10
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 23 05 29
L:\2014\214415 SJCC B200 \SPECS\Mechanical\230529.doc
Page 11
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 23 05 53
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation: 1. Equipment nameplates. 2. Equipment markers. 3. Equipment signs. 4. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.
1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment.
Page 1
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
1. Data: a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. c. Labels of tested compliances. 2. Location: Accessible and visible. 3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment. B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact- type, permanent adhesive. 1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. 2 Data: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed. 3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 23 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.
3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment: 1. Fans and heaters. B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if both are indicated. 1. Letter Size: Minimum ¼ inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, ½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
Page 2
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units. 3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general categories of equipment: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. b. Fire department hose valves and hose stations. c. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units. d. Fuel-burning units. e. Heat exchangers and similar equipment. f. Fans, blowers and primary balancing dampers. C. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible. 1. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes: a. Green: For cooling equipment and components. b. Yellow: For heating equipment and components. c. Green and Yellow: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components. d. Brown: For energy-reclamation equipment and components. 2. Letter Size: Minimum ¼ inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, ½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units. 4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. b. Heat exchangers and similar equipment. c. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. D. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.
3.3 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.
Page 3
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
3.4 CLEANING A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION 23 05 53
L:\2014\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Mechanical\230553.doc
Page 4
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives, including the following: 2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated air flows. 3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment. 4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment. 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association. C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. D. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. B. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Prepared on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by AABC or NEBB. B. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. 2. Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." or NEBB's
Page 1
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification" as appropriate. E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.5 WARRANTY A. National Project Performance Guarantee: For AABC certified agents, provide a guarantee on AABC'S "National Standards" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: 1. The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. B. Special Guarantee: For NEBB certified agents, provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: 1. The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to construction, examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment. B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine equipment performance data, including fan curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
Page 2
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
E. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed. F. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. G. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
3.3 TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to procedures contained in AABC national standards or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
3.4 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Exhaust Fans: Plus 10 to minus 5 percent.
3.5 REPORTS A. Final Report: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, bound in three-ring, loose-leaf binder, and tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing agent. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: a. Title page. b. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. c. Project name. d. Project location. e. Architect's name and address. f. Engineer's name and address. g. Contractor's name and address. h. Report date.
Page 3
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
i. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
L:\2014\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Mechanical\230593.doc
Page 4
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 16 WELDING FUME EXHAUST SYSTEM
SECTION 11612 WELDING FUME EXHAUST SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Welding fume exhaust system and controls 2. Accessories 3. Additional System Equipment
B. Engineering Support
C. Commissioning
1.02 WELDING FUME EXHAUST SYSTEM GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS
B. The following specifications are based on The Lincoln Electric Company Fume Extraction System. Equivalent products and systems that meet these specifications may be submitted for engineering review and approval prior to bid closing date.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY Welding Fume Exhaust System equipment and accessories shall be manufactured and furnished by a single manufacturer.
B. MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS Modern plant with proper tools, dies, fixtures and skilled workmen to produce high quality equipment; and shall meet the following minimum requirements: a. Five years or more experience in the manufacture of welding exhaust systems and equipment of type specific. b. Ten installations of equal or larger size and requirements. Provide contact and references for each.
C. INSTALLER’S QUALIFICATIONS Factory certified by the manufacturer. Provide outline of certification program.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. SCHEDULING Schedule delivery of equipment so that spaces are sufficiently complete and equipment can be installed immediately following delivery.
B. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION Protect finished surfaces from soiling or damage during handling and installation. Keep covered with protective plastic minimum (6 mil poly) or waterproof tarp designed for outdoor use. Unless written permission is obtained from manufacturer, equipment is to be stored “in-doors” until time of installation.
Page 1
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 16 WELDING FUME EXHAUST SYSTEM
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Design, materials, construction, and finish of welding extraction system specified, is the minimum acceptable standard of quality.
B. Manufacturers, subject to comply with requirements for the welding extraction system, are approved for bidding, provided they meet the contract document specifications, include the following: 1. Lincoln Electric or pre-approved equivalent
C. Products: Product Number listed is for Lincoln Electric use only. Approved equivalents shall provide the product numbers as required to identify product and product specifications.
FUME EXTRACTION SYSTEM
Quantity Product Number Product Description
20 K1655-7 LTA 2.0-CW Wall mounted telescopic articulating fume extraction arm with 360 deg. rotating hood. The working radius ranges from 3’ to 7’. The nominal diameter of the arm is 8 inches. Spring balance and counterweight allow arm to maintain position. Adjustable throttling valve is in hood. The arm is designed to be positioned 6-12” away from the welding process.
1 S23385-41 MANUAL DAMPER, MD200MM The manual damper is used to balance the air flow at each fume extraction arm. It is located between the arm and the duct main. The damper is made from galvanized steel, and is 200mm in diameter with EPDM rubber seal.
1 S23267-1 ENV, CUT S23267 TO 8" DIAMETER MARK
Eight inch tapered connection flange used to adapt an extraction arm to a weld fume control central system.
1 AD1389-2 FILTER, PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL KIT Monitors the saturation level of the filter cartridges and adjusts the air volume rate based upon a predetermined setpoint. As filter cartridges become saturated, the controller adjusts the fan speed to
Page 2
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 16 WELDING FUME EXHAUST SYSTEM
maintain the required air volume determined by the air volume setpoint.
1 M18464-17 EXT.FAN,40HP,13200CFM,230/460V,12 IN.WG. Mechanical Specifications: Fan housing Steel Motor Enclosure TEFC Dimensions WxLxH 51.9”x52.5”x59” Weight 1679 lbs Construction class Class III Inlet/Outlet dims. 33.56” dia/23.8”x29.2” Fan model SQBI-300 Fan speed 1750 rpm Wheel description SQ backward Inclined Wheel width 80% Wheel dia. 32.38 in Outlet Velocity 2,813 fpm Performance 13,200 cfm @ 12” w.c. (@ 70 deg, 0.075 lb/ft3)
Electrical Specifications: Voltage 230,460V/3ph/60Hz BHP 38.5 Power 40 HP
1 AD1283-46 ENV,POWERFLEX 400,40HP, 240VAC/3PH/120AMP,IP54VFD The variable frequency drive (VFD) regulates the fan input voltage based on either a differential pressure signal or a signal from the IF-15 control box. UL listed to UL508C, NEMA ICS 3.1, IEC 146. Electrical Specifications: Voltage Tolerance 200-240V +or- 10% 380-480V +or- 10% Frequency Tolerance 48-63 Hz Input phases 3 phase = full rating. De- rate for single phase. Displacement pf 0.98 across entire speed range Efficiency 97.5% @ rated amps, nominal line voltage
Environment: Altitude 3300ft without derating Air Temp IP20,NEMA/UL type open = -10 to 50 deg C. Humidity 0-95% non-condensing
1 XCUSTOM_ITEM ON/OFF PUSH BUTTON CONTROLLER Kit includes the following:
Page 3
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 16 WELDING FUME EXHAUST SYSTEM
(1) – S21118-91 Enclosure (1) – S21130-76 Push Button, Green LED, Ilum (1) – S21130-46 Red Push Button, AB (1) – S22628-5 Push Button, contact block, 2 N.C.
1 S21118-91 ENCLOSURE, 2 ELEMENT, STEEL 30.5mm, Heavy-Duty, Pilot Device Enclosure, Gray, Steel, Surface Mount, 2 Element, 1 Contact Block Depth, NEMA 12, 13.
1 S21130-76 FLUSH PUSHBUTTON, 30mm Flush pushbutton, 30.5mm, Illuminated, Green, 800T, NEMA Rating: 4/13, 1 NO
1 S21130-46 FLUSH PUSHBUTTON, 30mm Flush pushbutton, 30.5mm, Non-Illuminated, Red, 800T, NEMA Rating: 4/13, 1 NO
1 S22628-5 30mm CONTACT BLOCK, 1 N.C. 1 N.C. Contact Block, 30.5 mm, Base Mount, Non-Metallic, 800T Series
1 L16480-32 STATIFLEX FB-24-STD/CPL The Statiflex filter bank is a modular dust bank that is designed to accommodate nearly any welding/cutting application. It is equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism and dust bin below the filter to collect the particulate. The cleaning mechanism is designed to eliminate filter clogging. Inside every filter cartridge, is a patented pulsed air amplifier that disperses compressed air for cleaning. This pulsed air releases the dust collected on the surface of the filter. The frame is constructed of heavy gauge steel tubes and channels and heavy gauge steel sheeting. The entire structure is sealed weather tight with a polyester coating. Neoprene gaskets are used to seal the filter air and weather tight. Install outdoors or indoors.
Technical Data: Aiflow/cartridge 580 cfm Arrangement (24) cartridges 4 x 6 Inlet Dim. 32” I.D. Outlet Dim. 2-20” O.D. Compressed Air 85 psi Compressed Air conn. 12 mm push-in fitting CA quality ISO 8573-1 Class 6 Input power 115, 208, 230, 400, 460, or 575 V Working temperature 14 to 122 deg. F Frequency 50/60 Hz Output voltage 24 V AC Power consumption 75 W
Page 4
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 16 WELDING FUME EXHAUST SYSTEM
Safety classification IP 54 / NEMA 12
Applications: MIG-MAG/GMAW welding TIG welding FCAW welding Stick/SMAW welding
24 KP3369-1 FILTER-MERV 16 STATIFLEX FILTER BANK The Cart-MB filter media is an 80/20 blend (Cellulose/Spun Bond Polyester) with a Nano fiber overlay. Each cartridge is created using a pleat stabilizing technique that ensures correct distances between cartridge pleats. This allows for more “effective” filter area resulting in better cleaning efficiency. The result is a lower cartridge replacement rate. This filter has a MERV-16 rating based on the ASHRAE 52.2 test.
1 S23273-6 ENV, CTRL BOX FB, PRESSURE, UP TO 24 CART The Cont-C24 monitors filter pressure and ensures cleaning is done only when necessary reducing the compressed air usage.
1 XCUSTOM_ITEM STRAIGHT SILENCER 40HP Dual walled, inline, straight duct silencer. The sound reduction is 12 dBA. Duct connection inserts included.
ENGINEERING SUPPORT
Provide engineering and installation phone support for the electrical and mechanical contractors. Lincoln Electric does not provide spiral ductwork nor the installation of the system which includes and is not limited to any HVAC components, electrical connections, equipment handling and mounting, and compressed air connections.
Lincoln Electric will provide one system installation manual. This manual is included with the purchase of the quoted system and will be shipped with the equipment. Additional hard copies are available for an additional charge of $100.00 for each copy. Electronic versions will be provided upon request from Lincoln’s customer.
COMMISSIONING
Provide system start-up, commissioning, and technician support to test and tune the system at initial system operation. Commissioning includes manual damper adjustment, airflow set point, extraction system operation and maintenance. Post installation commissioning include a point-to-point checklist and sign-off procedure. A minimum of two weeks is required prior to commission date to establish a travel itinerary. One factory technician will be provided.
Page 5
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 16 WELDING FUME EXHAUST SYSTEM
Lincoln Electric requires that the technician be on-site and present at the time of start-up of the system. The system shall not be used to test the leakage of ductwork or to test electrical connections, wiring or compressed air system.
Commissioning data and reports are done for the purpose of warranting the system. Created reports are not intended to be used for any official use. If a certified report is required in your area, contact Lincoln Electric prior to purchase.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation: 1. Install welding fume extraction system and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Install equipment plumb, square, and straight with no distortion and securely anchored as required. 3. Secure equipment components with material and procedures recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Install ductwork in accordance with Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction by SMACNA.
B. Accessory installation: Install all accessories and fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING OF WELDING FUME EXTRACTION SYSTEM
A. Field testing requirements: 1. Perform tests in field to verify proper operation of the system before they are put in use, using only qualified personnel. 2. Correct any unsafe conditions disclosed by these tests before request of test procedures. 3. Commissioning and balancing of the fan, VFD, and fume extraction arms shall be completed by a Lincoln Electric service technician.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Repair or remove and replace defective work, as directed by Architect (G.C., or entity in charge of the project) upon completion of installation.
B. Adjust fixtures, accessories and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean equipment, touch up as required.
Page 6
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 16 WELDING FUME EXHAUST SYSTEM
3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Provide all necessary protective measures to prevent exposure of equipment to other construction activity.
B. Advise contractor, of procedures and precautions, for protections of material and installed system, from damage by work of other trades.
END OF SECTION
Page 7
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 23 POWER VENTILATORS
SECTION 23 34 23
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Utility Set Exhaust Fans.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts. 5. Backdraft damper, including housings.
B. Coordination Drawings: Show roof penetration requirements and reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating roof penetrations and units mounted above ceiling. Show the following: 1. Wall framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
C. Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
Page 1
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 23 POWER VENTILATORS
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Belts: One (1) set for each belt-driven unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Utility Set Exhaust Fans: a. Lincoln Electric, or approved equal.
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL SIDEWALL VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans with belt guards consisting of housing, high efficiency non-overloading backward inclined wheel of heavy duty construction, fan shaft with motor drives, bearings, motor on adjustable base with disconnect switch, drive assembly, weather cover, backdraft damper, inlet & discharge connections and accessories.
B. Housing: Fan housings shall be fabricated of heavy gauge, continuously welded steel.
C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
Page 2
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 23 POWER VENTILATORS
D. Direct-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features: 1. All parts in airstream shall be protected with a polyester powder coating.
E. Accessories: 1. Vibration isolators. 2. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers; factory set to close when fan is de-energized.
3. Inlet and discharge connection collars.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, and premium efficiency.
B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install exhaust fans level and plumb.
B. Secure fans to supports with cadmium-plated hardware.
C. Provide restrain supports for Seismic Zone 4.
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 05 53 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment.
Page 3
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 23 POWER VENTILATORS
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Equipment Startup Checks: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connection to electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
B. Starting Procedures: 1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm. 2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Refer to 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.
Page 4
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 23 34 23 POWER VENTILATORS
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Refer to Division 23 Section “Mechanical General Requirements”. 1. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days advance notice.
END OF SECTION 23 34 23
L:\2014\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Mechanical\233423.doc
Page 5
Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division I - General Requirements, and the drawings. The Contractor, shall read the conditions and be responsible for, and governed by, all requirements thereunder. This Condition applies to all Sections of Specification Division 26.
1.2 REGULATIONS
A. The Contractor shall give required notices to the building inspectors, the Engineer and the Owner and comply with laws, ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to the work and safety. Authorities include, but are not limited to:
1. The latest revision of the State of California Electrical Code. 2. The applicable Rules and Regulations of the National Fire Protection Association. 3. State Fire Marshal. 4. Underwriters Laboratories. 5. Any other applicable Federal, State, County or City Codes or Regulations, including O.S.H.A.
B. Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to the above Regulations and Codes.
1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of equipment and wiring. Exact requirements shall be governed by architectural, structural and mechanical conditions of the job. Consult other drawings in preparation of the bid.
B. Extra lengths of wiring or pull boxes or junction boxes, etc., necessitated by conditions shall be included in the bid. Report any apparent discrepancies before submitting bid.
C. Right is reserved by the Owner to make changes of up to ten feet in location of any outlet or equipment prior to roughing-in without increasing contract cost.
1.4 EXAMINATION OF SITE
A. The Contractor shall examine the site and the existing conditions and make allowances for them in preparing his proposal. In the event of discrepancies between existing conditions and the Drawings, the Contractor shall report such discrepancies prior to bid and bid the conditions necessary to complete the job and to provide a fully operable and acceptable systems.
B. Extra charges will not be allowed for work that must be provided when it was apparent from a pre-bid inspection of the premises, even though the work is not shown on the drawings or called for in the Specification.
PAG E 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS AND SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections “Closeout Procedures”, “Operation and Maintenance Data”, “Project Record Documentation” and “Demonstration and Training”.
1.6 SHOP DRAWING AND MATERIAL LIST
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections “Submitall Procedures”.
1.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections “Operation and Maintenance Data”.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Receive, store and handle materials in a manner to prevent damage. Costs of damage shall be borne by the Contractor.
B. Protect equipment from weather (rain, sunshine, winds), water vapors, theft, and vehicular traffic.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL APPROVAL
A. The design, manufacture and testing of electrical equipment and materials shall conform to or exceed latest applicable NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and U.L. Standards.
B. Materials shall be new and bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) label or other accepted testing laboratory certification. Materials that are not labeled by U.L. shall be tested and approved by an independent testing laboratory or a governmental agency acceptable to the Engineer, Owner and code enforcing authority.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP AND CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installation of parts and connection of parts into systems shall be completed by skilled electrical journeymen. Material assemblies and installation work shall be securely fastened to structure, attractive in appearance and safe to operate. Provide code required clearance about electrical equipment. Assembly work or installations that are improper, unsafe or unattractive shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory work at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Provide a foreman or superintendent in charge of this work at all times.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid conflict and to provide correct rough-in and connection for equipment furnished by other trades. Inform other trades Sub-contractors of the required access to, and clearances around, electrical equipment to maintain serviceability and code compliance.
PAG E 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B. Verify equipment dimensions and requirements. Check actual job conditions before installing work. Report necessary changes in design to Construction Manager in time to prevent needless work. Changes, or additions subject to additional compensation, which are made without written authorization and an agreed price, shall be at Contractor's risk and expense.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Where the specifications call for an installation to be made in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations, a copy of such recommendations shall at all times be kept in the job superintendent's office and shall be available to the Owner's representative.
B. Follow manufacturer's instructions where they cover points not specifically indicated on drawings and specifications. If instructions are in conflict with the drawings and specifications, obtain clarification from the Engineer before starting work.
3.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide a Quality Assurance program. These specifications set forth the minimum acceptable requirements. The specifications do not prohibit the Contractor from executing other Quality Assurance measures which can improve the operating facility, improve the construction schedule, and conserve energy within the scope of this project.
B. The Contractor shall insure that workmen's practices, materials employed, equipment and methods of installation conform to accepted construction and engineering practices, and that each piece of equipment can satisfactorily perform its functional operation.
3.5 CLOSING IN UNINSPECTED WORK
A. The Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the work to be covered up or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested and/or approved. Field observations made by the architect or engineer do not waive the inspections required by the contract documents.
B. Should a portion of the work be enclosed or covered up prior to inspection and testing, the contractor shall uncover the work at his own expense, and after it has been tested, inspected and approved, make repairs with such materials as may be necessary to restore the uncovered work to its intended condition.
3.6 PRELIMINARY OPERATION
A. Should the Owner request that a portion of the plant, apparatus or equipment be operated prior to final completion and acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall consent, and such operation shall be under the supervision and direction of the Contractor, but expense thereof shall be paid by the Owner, separate and distinct from money paid on account of the Contract. Such preliminary operation and payment thereof shall not be construed as an acceptance of that portion of the work in this Contract.
3.7 ACCEPTANCE DEMONSTRATION
A. Refer to Division 1 Section “Demonstration and Training”.
PAG E 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B. The system demonstrations shall be made by this Contractor in the presence of the District's facilities manager or his designated representative and the manufacturer's representative.
C. Demonstrate the function (in the structure) of each system and indicate its relationship to the single line diagrams and drawings.
D. Demonstrate by "start-stop operation", the controls, how to reset protective devices, how to replace fuses and what to do in case of emergency.
E. Demonstrate how maintenance and spare parts manuals are related to the equipment and systems installed.
3.8 TESTS
A. Where the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances or any public authority requires any work to be tested specifically or reviewed by another authority, the Contractor shall give the Engineer/Owner timely notice of readiness therefor. The Contractor shall give the Engineer/Owner the test results for review. If any work to be tested is covered up without written approval or consent of the Architect, it must, if directed by the Architect, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense.
B. The cost of all such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
C. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any test or any work which does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective and may be rejected. Rejected work shall be corrected promptly by the Contractor or removed from the site.
D. Provide written test reports for each test to the Engineer for review.
END OF SECTION 260000
I:\14\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\26 00 00.doc
PAG E 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 26 05 00
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 3. Touchup painting.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.
C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.
1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground services, including provision for electricity-metering components. 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services.
D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C- clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click- type hangers.
E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
F. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
G. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
2.2 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
E. Coordination: Coordinate with work of other trades, especially other utilities routes and clearances required to properly provide work.
3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials, U-channel system components.
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four (4); minimum of 200-lb design load.
3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze or bracket-type hangers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations, so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F. Install 1/4-inch diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.
H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceways with an approved fastener not more than 24-inches from the box.
K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core- drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire- rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.
M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated:
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails. 2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units. 3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
6. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items. 7. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. 8. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-test load.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections “Cutting and Patching” and “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems”.
B. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
C. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new firepstopping where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical demolition. 3. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 4. Touchup painting.
3.8 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touchup paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. B. Remove and replace with new items damaged beyond repair or refinishing.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations, and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 260500
I:\14\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical \260500.DOC
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 23 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 23 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Okonite Wire & Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company.
B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.
C. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5; stranded conductor.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 23 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5.
2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 3. Hubbell/Anderson. 4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete and Below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
D. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
G. Fire Alarm Circuits: Refer to Section 28 31 00 – Fire Alarm Sysrtem.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All conductors and cables shall be installed in raceways.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
D. Seal around conduits penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems.”
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 23 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
E. Open cable installed above accessible ceiling space shall be supported by metallic J-hooks. No stapling is allowed. Staples used shall be removed and cable conductivity shall be tested by contractor at contractor’s cost.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
B. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 260523
I:\14\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\260523.DOC
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING
SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Ground rods and ground rod well. 2. Fittings.
B. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:
1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1. Comply with UL 467.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING
1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:
a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. b. Chance/Hubbell. c. Copperweld Corp. d. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. e. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. f. Galvan Industries, Inc. g. Ideal Industries, Inc. h. ILSCO. i. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. j. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. k. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. l. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. m. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. n. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."
B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
C. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
G. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:
1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
H. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING
2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.
B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions.
2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.
1. Size: 5/8 inch in diameter and 96 inches in length.
B. Test Wells: Provide handholes "Christy" G5 or equal, with cast iron traffic lid and hold down screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells.
D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
E. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts.
F. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.
B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits.
C. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING
from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
E. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.
F. Water Heater and Heat-Tracing Cable: Install a separate equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
G. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.
1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.
B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING
E. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
F. Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service entrance. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor.
G. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, Paragraph 250-81(c), using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor to the main ground bus in the electrical room.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.
D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted- and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.
F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING
H. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.
3.5 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING
A. Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod close to wall and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide a No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.
B. Connections to Manhole Components: Connect exposed-metal parts, such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. c. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect and Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526 I:\14\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\2 0526.DOC
PAGE 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Divisions 26, 27 and 28 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods", “Fire Alarm System”, “Paging and Clock System”, “Data / Telephone System” and “Television System” for supports, anchors, and identification products. 2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service fittings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For conduit, fittings, surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with existing conditions and work of other trades.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.
2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 4. Electri-Flex Co. 5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Co.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
D. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
1. Fittings: Compression type.
E. FMC: Aluminum.
F. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.
2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. American International. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corp. 4. Cantex Inc. 5. Carlon. 6. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 7. Condux International. 8. ElecSYS, Inc. 9. Electri-Flex Co. 10. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
11. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 12. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.
C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
2.4 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Hoffman. 2. Square D.
B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.
E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.
F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture and manufacturer's standard bright white color.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). b. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
B. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceways.
2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. Walker Omni box, RFB 4 or equal as indicated.
E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
G. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.7 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime- coat finish ready for field painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors:
1. Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC. 2. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC. 3. Underground, Single Run: RNC. 4. Underground, Grouped: RNC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors:
1. Exposed: EMT. 2. Concealed: EMT.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:
a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches of concrete cover.
1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. 2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 4. Change from rigid nonmetallic conduit to rigid steel conduit or IMC before rising above the floor.
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
I. Raceways below Slabs: Install in base rock below slab where practical and leave at least 2 inches of base rock cover.
J. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible.
1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.
K. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.
1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
L. Terminations:
1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.
M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 18 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
N. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2 Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90- degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.
O. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.
P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
Q. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.
R. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
S. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
PAGE 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace with new any item damaged beyond repair or refinishing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 260533
I:\14\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\260533.DOC
PAGE 7 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Schedule of Nomenclature: An index of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
1. Color: Black letters on orange field. 2. Legend: Indicates voltage and service.
B. Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl with legend overlaminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating.
C. Pretensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pretensioned gripping action when placed in position.
D. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.
E. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape.
1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend indicating type of underground line.
F. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
G. Brass or Aluminum Tags: 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener.
2.2 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS
A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.
B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
C. Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
D. Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose- acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
E. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32, stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.
1 Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: According to color-coding.
B. Paint: Formulated for the type of surface and intended use.
1. Primer for Galvanized Metal: Single-component acrylic vehicle formulated for galvanized surfaces. 2. Primer for Concrete Masonry Units: Heavy-duty-resin block filler. 3. Primer for Concrete: Clear, alkali-resistant, binder-type sealer. 4. Enamel: Silicone-alkyd or alkyd urethane as recommended by primer manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
B. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
C. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
E. Install painted identification according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. 2. Prime surfaces using type of primer specified for surface. 3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of enamel.
F. Caution Labels for Indoor Boxes and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Install pressure- sensitive, self-adhesive labels identifying system voltage with black letters on orange background. Install on exterior of door or cover.
G. Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 12 inches below finished grade. Where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench does not exceed 16 inches overall, use a single line marker.
H. Color-Coding of Secondary Phase Conductors: Use the following colors for phase conductors:
1. 208/120-V Conductors:
a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White e. Ground: Green.
2. 480/277-V Conductors:
a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Grey e. Ground: Green.
3. Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-applied, color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG.
a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal and spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten to a snug fit, and cut off excess length.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
I. Power-Circuit Identification: Metal tags or aluminum, wraparound marker bands for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms.
1. Legend: 1/4 inch steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend corresponding to indicated circuit designations. 2. Tag Fasteners: Nylon cable ties. 3. Band Fasteners: Integral ears.
J. Apply identification to conductors as follows:
1. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding to identify circuits' voltage and phase. 3. Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of tags, color- coding, or cable marking tape.
K. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:
1. Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic- laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
L. Device Identification Labels: Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl with legend overlaminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating. Install on each device cover of power receptacles, switches and tele/data outlets with feeder source (i.e. panelboard, MDF, IDF) and circuit number information.
M. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high lettering on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Use white lettering on black field. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of equipment using mechanical fasteners:
1. Switchboard, distribution panel, branch circuit panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. 2. Branch feeder breakers at switchboard and distribution panel. 3. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. 4. Disconnect switches. 5. Enclosed circuit breakers. 10. Dimmers. 11. Control devices.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
I:\14\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\260553.DOC
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 09 23 LIGHITNG CONTROL DEVICE
SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers and manual light switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for lighting control devices.
B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
C. Maintenance Data: For lighting control devices to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, for their indicated use and installation conditions by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with 47 CFR 15, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of devices specified in this Section with systems and components specified in other Sections to form an integrated system of compatible components. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions. Include coordination with Division 26 Section "Panelboards."
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 09 23 LIGHITNG CONTROL DEVICE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Occupancy Sensors:
a. Watt Stopper, Inc. (The). b. Hubbell Lighting, Inc. c. Lightolier. d. Novitas, Inc. e.. Sensor Switch, Inc.
2.2 GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Line-Voltage Surge Protection: Include in all 120V solid-state equipment. Comply with UL 1449 and with ANSI C62.41 for Category A locations.
2.3 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Ceiling-Mounting Units: Unit receives control power from a separately mounted auxiliary power and control unit, and operates power switching contacts in that unit.
B. Switch-Box-Mounting Units: Unit receives power directly from switch leg of the 120- or 277-V ac circuit it controls and operates integral power switching contacts rated 800 W at 120-V ac, and 1000 W at 277-V ac, minimum.
C. Operation: Turns lights on when room or covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Time Delay for Turning Lights Off: Adjustable over a range from 1 to 15 minutes, minimum. 2. Manual Override Switch: Turns lights off manually regardless of elapsed time delay.
D. Auxiliary Power and Control Units: As follows:
1. Relays rated for a minimum of 20-A normal ballast load or 13-A tungsten filament or high-inrush ballast load. 2. Sensor Power Supply: Rated to supply the number of connected sensors.
E. Passive-Infrared Type: Detects occupancy by a combination of heat and movement in zone of coverage. Each sensor detects occupancy anywhere in an area of 1000 sq. ft. by detecting occurrence of 6-inch minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a minimum target of 36 sq. in. to the sensor.
F. Dual-Technology Type: Uses a combination of passive-infrared and ultrasonic detection methods to distinguish between occupied and unoccupied conditions for area covered.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 09 23 LIGHITNG CONTROL DEVICE
Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls each function (on or off) is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.
G. All wall mounted device cover plate shall be of 0.04” thick, Type 302, satin-finished stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Mount lighting control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and to center of unit for wall-mounting devices.
3.2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified in Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables" for low- voltage connections and Division 27 Section "Data/Telephone Systems" for digital circuits.
B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
C. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
D. Ground equipment.
E. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven days' advance notice.
B. Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents.
C. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state components. Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 09 23 LIGHITNG CONTROL DEVICE
1. Continuity tests of circuits. 2. Operational Tests: Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions.
a. Include testing of devices under conditions that simulate actual operational conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and functional observations.
D. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified requirements are met.
E. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and representative.
F. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:
1. Schedule training with Owner, through Construction Manager, with at least seven days' advance notice.
3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three Project site visits, when requested, to adjust light levels, make program changes, and adjust sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.
END OF SECTION 26 09 23
L:\2014\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\26 09 23.DOC
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 22 00 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER
SECTION 26 22 00 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes dry-type distribution and specialty transformers rated 1000 V and less.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance for each type of transformer specified. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevation views. Show minimum clearances and installed devices and features.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing and connecting field- installed wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transformers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Factory Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's design and routine factory tests required by referenced standards.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for tests specified in Part 3.
F. Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," an independent testing agency shall meet OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907; or shall be a full-member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide transformers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
C. Comply with IEEE C2.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 22 00 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide transformers by one the following:
1. Acme Electric Corp.; Transformer Division. 2. Bryant Electric. 3. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp. 4. Federal Pacific Co.; Line Power Mfg. Corp. Subsidiary. 5. GE Electrical Distribution & Control. 6. Hammond Co.; Matra Electric, Inc. 7. MagneTek Inc. 8. Micron Industries Corp. 9. Sola/Hevi-Duty Electric. 10. Square D; Groupe Schneider.
2.2 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units of types specified, designed for 60-Hz service.
B. Cores: Grain-oriented, nonaging silicon steel.
C. Coils: Electrical grade aluminum. Continuous windings without splices, except for taps.
D. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
E. Enclosure: Class complies with NEMA 250 for the environment in which installed.
2.3 GENERAL-PURPOSE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA TP-1 and ST-20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Cores: One leg per phase.
C. Windings: One coil per phase in primary and secondary.
D. Enclosure: Indoor, ventilated, dripproof.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 22 00 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER
E. Insulation Class: 220 deg C.
1. Rated Temperature Rise: 150 deg C maximum rise above 40 deg C, for 220 deg C class insulation.
F. Taps: For transformers 3 kVA and larger, full-capacity taps in high-voltage windings are as follows:
1. Taps, 25 kVA and Above: Four 2.5-percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated high voltage.
G. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated are listed to comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current handling capability to the degree defined by the designated K-factor.
1. Transformer design prevents overheating when carrying full load with harmonic content corresponding to the designated K-factor. 2. Nameplate states the designated K-factor of the transformer.
2.4 CONTROL AND SIGNAL TRANSFORMERS
A. Units comply with NEMA ST 1 and are listed and labeled as complying with UL 506.
B. Ratings: Continuous duty. If rating is not indicated, provide capacity exceeding peak load by 50 percent minimum.
C. Description: Self-cooled, 2 windings.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Indoor Units: Manufacturer's standard paint over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and primer.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Design and routine tests comply with referenced standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with safety requirements of IEEE C2.
B. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for access and for circulation of cooling air.
C. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 22 00 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Separately Derived Systems: Comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding electrodes.
B. Comply with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for materials and installation requirements.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality- control testing.
B. Test Objectives: To ensure transformer is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, is installed according to the Contract Documents, and is suitable for energizing.
C. Test Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests for each transformer, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
D. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test commencement.
E. Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective materials and installation.
F. Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91 for test methods and data correction factors.
1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical integrity, and damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping bracing has been removed. Include internal inspection through access panels and covers. 2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's published torque values or, if not available, those specified in UL 486A. 3. Insulation Resistance: Perform megohmmeter tests of primary and secondary winding to winding and winding to ground.
a. Minimum Test Voltage: 1000 V, dc. b. Minimum Insulation Resistance: 500 megohms. c. Duration of Each Test: 10 minutes. d. Temperature Correction: Correct results for test temperature deviation from 20 deg C standard.
G. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match original finish. Clean components internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 22 00 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.
B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment throughout normal operating cycle of facility. Record primary and secondary voltages and tap settings and submit with test results.
END OF SECTION 26 22 00
I:\14\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\26 22 00.DOC
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 14 16 PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes load centers and panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types:
1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 2. Distribution panelboards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
C. Qualification Data: Submit data for testing agencies indicating that they comply with qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.
E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.
F. Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 14 16 PANELBOARDS
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:
1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. c. Industrial Electric Manufacturing (IEM). d. Square D Co.
2.2 FABRICATION AND FEATURES
A. Enclosures: Flush and surface mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, to meet environmental conditions at installed location.
B. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 14 16 PANELBOARDS
C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat.
D. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside panelboard door.
E. Bus: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
F. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.
G. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box.
H. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
I. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus Where Indicated: Adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; insulated from box.
J. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus Where Indicated: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads.
K. Feed-through Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING
A. UL label indicating series-connected rating with integral or remote upstream devices. Include size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series-connected short-circuit rating.
2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
B. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike to Owner’s standard.
2.5 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker.
B. Branch overcurrent protective devices shall be bolt-on type.
2.6 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 14 16 PANELBOARDS
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
D. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Provide temporary panel schedule during construction, handwritten directories are acceptable. Use a computer or typewriter to create the permanent directory at each panel.
E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
F. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future.
G. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification".
B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Safe off power source prior to connection of power panel.
B. Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 14 16 PANELBOARDS
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified testing.
C. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes as follows:
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data-processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.
E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove panel fronts so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies panelboards checked and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges according to the coordination report per Division 26 Section “Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination”.
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 14 16 PANELBOARDS
3.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
B. Remove and replace with new any item damaged beyond repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
L:\2014\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\26 24 16.DOC
PAGE 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product specified.
B. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with NEMA WD 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wiring Devices:
a. Bryant Electric, Inc. b. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices. c. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. d. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: General-Duty grade.
B. GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4 inch deep outlet box without an adapter.
2.3 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with type SOW-A jacket. Green-insulated grounding conductor, and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. 2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.
2.4 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Unfinished Spaces: 0.04 inch thick, Type 302, satin-finished stainless steel. 3. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth plastic.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Color: Bright white, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.
B. Install wall plates when painting is complete.
C. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.
D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
E. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
F. Protect devices and assemblies during painting.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
G. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets are installed to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate. 2. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use machine-printed, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant label tape on face of plate and durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor.
B. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Connect to isolated-ground conductor routed to designated isolated equipment ground terminal of electrical system.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque- tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six times.
B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Replace damaged or defective components.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
I:\14\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\26 27 26.DOC
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used for the following:
1. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
B. RMS: Root mean square.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit breakers. 3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Fusible Switches:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Square D Co.
2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Square D Co.
3. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground-Fault Trip:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Square D Co.
4. Molded-Case, Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Square D Co.
5. Integrally Fused, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Square D Co.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.
B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; with the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter- style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. 6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5mA trip sensitivity. 7. Molded-Case Switch: Molded-case circuit breaker without trip units.
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage. 5. Auxiliary Switch: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b"contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. 6. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 7. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground- fault protection function.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification".
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control and indication devices.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified testing.
C. Testing: After installing enclosed switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.7 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 26 28 16
I:\14\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\26 28 16.DOC
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 51 00 LIGHTING
SECTION 26 51 00
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section 26 09 23 "Lighting Control Devices".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture indicated, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and the following:
1. Dimensions of fixtures. 2. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance. 3. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. 4. Types of lamps.
B. Maintenance Data: For lighting fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures with ceiling system and other construction. Refer to Architectural drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each designation in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the drawings.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 51 00 LIGHTING
2.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges.
B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position.
D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic unless otherwise indicated.
1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and ultraviolet radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch minimum, unless greater thickness is indicated.
2.3 LED FIXTURES
A. LED fixtures shall provide a continuous and controllable light source. Lamp output and dimensions shall be in accordance with contract drawings and specifications. LED fixture lumen output will be in accordance with the specifications and shall not depreciate more than 20% after 10,000 hours of use. Rated lumen output for LED fixtures to operate in ambient temperature of 20 deg. C to +50 deg. C. White LED’s to have a minimum life of 50,000 hours and color LEDs to have a minimum of 100,000 hours.
B. All LEDs used in the LED fixtures will be of high brightness and proven quality. All LEDs shall be driven digitally with pulse width modulation control to prolong life and maintain consistency of lumen output.
C. All connections to fixtures will be reverse polarity protected and provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed or shorted during the installation process.
D. Fuse Protections: All power supply outputs will be either fuse protected or PTC-protected as per Class 2UL listing. All fixtures will have built-in fuse protection. All power supplies will provide for knockouts for conduit connections or clamp-style connection for low voltage wiring.
E. All LED drivers to be compatible with LEDs. All LED fixtures and drivers (power supplies) shall be furnished by single manufacture to insure compatibility.
F. Electric characteristics of LED drivers at 77 deg, F ambient temperature.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 51 00 LIGHTING
1. Input Voltage Range – 120-277V. 2. Efficiency Minimum – 80% 3. Output Current Regulation Range (+/-) 5%A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) – 20% maximum. 5. Power Factor – 0.9 minimum. 6. Crest Factor (LED Current) – 1.5 maximum. 7. FCC Class B for Conducted EMI. 8. FCC Class A for Radiated EMI. 9. Driver life – 50,000 hours minimum.
2.4 EXIT SIGNS
A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 924 and the following:
1. Sign Colors and Lettering Size: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs: As follows:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: Light-emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Additional Lamps for DC Operation: Two minimum, bayonet-base type, for connection to external dc source.
C. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack.
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
D. Self-Illuminated Exit Signs:
1. Tritium filled gas tubes with 20 year luminous life.
2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. General Requirements: Self-contained units. Comply with UL 924. Units include the following features:
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type with minimum 10-year nominal life. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Wire Guard: Where indicated, heavy-chrome-plated wire guard arranged to protect lamp heads or fixtures.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 51 00 LIGHTING
5. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Arranged to hold unit on for fixed interval after restoring power after an outage. Provides adequate time delay to permit high-intensity-discharge lamps to restrike and develop adequate output.
2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2 inch steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2 inch steel tubes with single canopy arranged to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Rod Hangers: 1/4 inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
F. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended by fixture manufacturer.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each fixture.
B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support.
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Arrange as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4 inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 26 51 00 LIGHTING
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable installed according to fixture manufacturer's written instructions and details on Drawings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.
C. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
D. Tests: As follows:
1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. 2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation. 3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal. 4. Report results in writing.
E. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.
F. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period.
3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
L:\2014\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\26 51 00.DOC
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 27 00 00 DATA/TELEPHONE CABLING
SECTION 27 00 00
DATA/TELEPHONE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete installation of a complete Category 6 UTP structured cabling system and work called for in the Construction Documents. This shall include but is not limited to all UTP copper cabling,patch panels, modular connectors, cable management and accessories for a complete system. Refer to district Information Technology Guidelines for district standard compliance requirement.
B. The purpose of this document is to describe the minimum requirements and establish the design guidelines for the Communications Horizontal Cabling that shall support data throughout the network from designated Telecommunications Rooms (TR) to Work Area Outlets (WAO) located at various desks, workstation, under floor, conference room table and other locations as indicated on the contract drawings and described herein.
C. All copper cable terminations shall comply with, and be tested to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part: 2 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part: 2 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components – Addendum 1 – Transmission Performance for 4 Pair 100ohm Category 6 Cabling. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-6 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part: 2 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components – Addendum 6 – Category 6 Related Component Test Procedures.
D. The electrical contractor is responsible for the provision and installation of all data/telephone raceways, boxes, cabling and terminations. Owner will supply and install the telephone system and all electronic data equipment.
E. Perform all work in compliance with local, state, and federal codes and regulations that may affect this described work.
F. Inspection of work provided by other trades is required by contractor. Commencement of work described herein will serve as evidence that the contractor has accepted all prior and or ongoing work performed by other trades for the structured cabling system. All necessary changes done without prior written authorization shall be done at the contractors own risk and expense.
G. It is the contractors’ responsibility to verify the capacity of the structured cabling pathways, and that they are sufficient for the designed structured cabling system. Any discrepancy between site conditions and the construction drawings must be brought to the attention of the Project Manager, Architect and Owner in writing. Commencement of work implies acceptance of the site conditions by the contractor.
H. It is the contractors’ responsibility to field verify all pathways, routes and dimensions necessary for the structured cabling system, and that all pathways and spaces are installed prior to cable installation. Commencement of work implies acceptance of the pathways by contractor.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 27 00 00 DATA/TELEPHONE CABLING
I. The construction documents do not necessarily describe all the required work to satisfy their intention. On the basis of work described herein, and or indicated in the Drawings, the contractor shall furnish all items and provide all labor required providing a complete, standards based structured cabling system.
J. The contractor shall be responsible for damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a result of there work. Repair of surfaces, including painting, shall be included as necessary.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a contractor-generated detailed bill of materials required for installation based on the construction documents. Clearly indicate manufacturer, part number, and quantity to be provided to complete the scope of work.
B. The communications contractor shall be certain that all correct parts are ordered per Products Section of this document and installed in accordance with manufacturers design and installation guidelines. Vendor shall submit complete parts and part numbers prior to installation of equipment, failure to do so is done at the risk of the contractor.
C. It is the contractors’ responsibility to verify all part numbers in this specification and to make aware the customer of any changes that the manufacturer may have made to part numbers or product.
D. The communications contractor shall guarantee at the time of the bid that all Category 6, and fiber optic cabling and components meet or exceed specifications (including installation) of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, 568-B.2, 568-B.3 and 569.
E. Warranty shall be a twenty-five (25) year manufacturer supported extended warranty issued to the customer upon completion of the project. The warranty shall be an applications assurance warranty guaranteeing that the installed system shall support any application present and future that is designed to run on the installed infrastructure. The warranty shall cover 100% material and labor for the installed system.
F. Documentation from the manufacturer that the contractor has authority to provide the warranty on behalf of the manufacturer.
G. Complete documentation regarding the manufacturer’s warranty shall be submitted as part of the proposal. This shall include, but is not limited to: a sample of the warranty that would be provided to the customer when the installation is complete and documentation of the support procedure for warranty issues.
1.3 REFERENCES AD STANDARDS INCORPORATED
A. Published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry, or government organizations apply to work of this section where cited by abbreviation noted below.
1. ANSI American National Standards Institute 2. EIA Electrical Industries Association of America 3. ISO International Standards Organization 4. ITU International Telecommunications Union
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 27 00 00 DATA/TELEPHONE CABLING
5. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 6. NEC National Electric Code 7. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 8. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 9. TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
B. Nothing in drawings, details, or specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or industry standards. It is contractor’s responsibility to field verify all conditions, including footages between and within buildings.
C. It is not the intent of the drawings, details, or specifications to repeat requirements of codes or standards except where necessary for completeness or clarity.
D. Contractor is expected to adhere to and follow the most recent standards, codes and publications.
E. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard – Part 1: General requirements, April 1, 2001.
F. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components, April 1, 2001.
G. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Components - Addendum 1 - Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling, June 1, 2002.
H. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components - Addendum 2, December 1, 2001.
I. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling - Addendum 3 - Additional Considerations for Insertion Loss and Return Loss Pass/Fail Determination, March 1, 2001.
J. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling – Addendum 4 – Solderless Connection Reliability Requirements for Copper Connecting Hardware, June 2002.
K. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling – Addendum 5 – Corrections to TIA/EIA 568-B.2, January 2003.
L. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling – Addendum 6 – Category 6 Related Component Test Procedures, December 2003.
M. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-3 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, April, 2002.
N. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-3-1 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard - Addendum 1 - Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125 um Optical Fiber Cables, April 1, 2002.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 27 00 00 DATA/TELEPHONE CABLING
O. Compliance to industry standards and codes is mandatory. Do not proceed with work that is in conflict with codes and or standards without written direction from the Project Manager, Designer and Owner. Proceeding with work that is not compliant with codes and standards is done so at the contractors own risk and expense.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment and accessories to be the product of a vendor regularly engaged in its manufacture.
B. Supply cable, equipment, and accessories which are new, free from defects.
C. Equipment and accessories in compliance with the applicable standards listed in “References and Standards” of this Section and with applicable national, state, and local codes.
D. Items of a given type shall be of the same manufacturer.
1.5 DESIGN METHODOLOGY
A. Provide Category 6 cable to each WAO location. Each of the WAO’s shall be configured per the construction documents. Cables shall be installed from the corresponding IDF to each WAO location. Contractor shall terminate WAO cables onto Uniprise Category 6 RJ45 modular connectors. At the IDF locations, WAO cables shall be terminated on rack-mounted 48-port Category 6 RJ45 modular patch panels.
C. Refer to construction documents for location, quantity and configuration of each WAO needed and cable requirement at non-classroom area.
D. Cables must not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting fixture wires.
E. Pair untwist at termination shall not exceed 3.18mm (0.125”).
F. Bend radius of cable in termination area shall be no less than 4 times the outside diameter of the cable.
G. All cable and connectors shall be installed and terminated to the manufacturers’ guidelines, recommendations and best industry practices.
H. Cable shall be installed in continuous lengths from point of origin to termination point, no splices allowed.
I. Communications contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing the appropriate sized j-hooks where cable tray is not used.
J. Cable bundles of up to 50 cables may be supported by 2” j-hooks. Cable bundles of up to fifty 150 cables must be supported using 4” j-hooks.
K. J-hooks are to be placed at 48 to 60 inch intervals. At no point shall the cables rest on the acoustical ceiling.
L. Contractor shall use appropriate sized j-hooks for the cable bundle size the j-hooks are to support. No more than 50 UTP cables per 2” and no more than 150 UTP cables shall be placed per 4” j- hook.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 27 00 00 DATA/TELEPHONE CABLING
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Contractor shall attend a Pre-Installation Meeting to be conducted by the construction manager. Attendance shall be at the direction of the construction manager and may include the contractor's project manager, superintendent, subcontractors for the work of this specification section and subcontractors for work affected by this section; vendors, district technology and construction representatives and other parties affected by the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Quality of Products: Material and equipment specified herein have been selected as the basis of acceptable and desired quality of performance and have been coordinated to function as components of the specified system. Where a particular material, device, piece of equipment, or system is specified directly, the current manufacturer's specification for the same shall be considered to be part of these specifications, as if completely contained herein in every detail. Each material, device, or piece of equipment provided there under shall comply with all of the manufacturer's published specifications for that item.
B. Provide Complete: Provide all auxiliary and incidental materials and equipment necessary for the operation and protection of the work of this section as if specified in full herein.
C. Provide New: All materials provided under the work of this section shall be of the manufacturer's latest design/model and shall be permanently labeled with the manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
D. Similar: Similar devices shall be of the same manufacturer unless specifically noted otherwise in these specifications.
E. Continuous Use: all active circuitry shall be solid state and shall be rated for continuous use. All circuit components shall be operated in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall contain sufficient permanent identification to facilitate replacement.
2.2 DROP CABLE WIRING CLOSET HARDWARE
A. All wiring closet data connecting hardware shall be EIA/TIA TSB-40 Category 6 compliant.
B. All station cabling in the wiring closet for data connecting hardware shall be 48-port modular panels with RJ45 modular jacks.
C. The cabling in the wiring closet for voice connecting hardware that ties from the Category 3 cabling terminated on the 110 protection block in the IDF/MDF, to the equipment rack, shall have RJ45 jacks on the front and 110 style insulation displacement connectors (IDC) for termination of drop cable on the back.
D. All modular jacks shall be eight position jacks with pin/pair assignments utilizing EIA/TIA T568B.
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 27 00 00 DATA/TELEPHONE CABLING
2.3 DROP CABLE OUTLET HARDWARE
A. All data drop outlet/station outlet connecting hardware shall be EIA/TIA TSB-40 Category 6 compliant.
B. All drop outlet/station outlet hardware shall be modular jack outlets with Category 6 RJ45 modular jacks. Data inserts will be orange for cable number one and ivory for cable number two. Faceplate color will be ivory unless otherwise specified.
C. All modular jacks shall be eight (8) position jacks with pin/pair assignments utilizing EIA/TIA T568B.
D. All modular jacks will be placed into quadplex Uniprise faceplates with any unused openings supplied with blank inserts.
2.4 SYSTEM ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
A. No LAN switches, concentrators, or other electronic equipment are contained within this project.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Contractor will provide all racks, patch panels, wire management and equipment necessary to support data interconnect and hub/concentrator equipment at all MDF and IDF locations. Provide wall-mounted, double hinged, swing out cabinets, height determined by quantity of patch panels at each IDF location. Provide all locks of the same key code.
B. All associated connectors, wire management components, patch cords, cable, wire management and all miscellaneous materials required for a complete installation of the system shall be included in the package. All equipment shall be compatible with other equipment.
2.6 PARTS LIST SPECIFICATION
A. The LAN UTP cabling run inside buildings shall be 4-pair, Category 6 Uniprise CAT 6e 75N4 for non-plenum installation in gray color for voice and blue color for data., 7504 for plenum installation in gray color for voice and blue color for data, 6NF4+ for outside plant installation in black color.
B. The LAN and voice UTP cabling run between buildings shall be 4-pair, Category 3, jell filled cable, Uniprise.
C. Drop cable wiring closet hardware shall be Uniprise.
D. Drop cable outlet hardware shall be Uniprise (faceplate) and Uniprise Category 6.
E. Wall-mounted brackets, patch panels, and wire management equipment shall be Panduit, Chatsworth, or approved equivalent.
F. Data patch panels will be Uniprise #UNP610-48P 48-port with modular Category 6 RJ45 connectors. Provide panduit wire manager above and below patch panels or equal to match existing.
PAGE 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 27 00 00 DATA/TELEPHONE CABLING
G. Vertical cable managers shall be Panduit #WMPV545 (for side), #WMPV545 (for single rack, #WMPVC45 (for center) and #WMPHF2 (for front only), black finish or equal to match existing.
H. Voice / data patch cable shall be Uniprise UNC6 of 5’ or 7’ in length, gray color for voice and blue color for data. Confirm with district IT prior to ordering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All wire and cable shall be continuous and splice free for the entire length of run between designated IDF and station termination locations.
B. Terminate cable in designated terminal cabinets and/or on designated equipment backboards.
C. Provide service loop of cables at all junction and termination cabinets or boxes.
D. Maintain consistent absolute signal polarity at all connectors, patch points, and connection points accessible in the system.
E. Dress or harness all wire and cable to prevent mechanical stress of electrical connectors. No wire or cable shall be supported by a connection point. Provide service loops where harnesses of different classes cross or where hinged panels are to be interconnected.
F. All equipment and wiring shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a one (1) year period from the startup and beneficial use of the system.
G. Provide complete record drawings showing all equipment, location, and cable routing.
3.2 LABELING/TESTING
A. The contractor will label all outlets using permanent/legibly typed or machine engraved labels approved by the District. The labeling information for patch panels located in the IDFs will include the IDF number, patch panel number, sequential port number, and station number. Outlets shall be labeled to match the corresponding label in the IDF. All copper/fiber terminations for riser/backbone cables in the IDF(s) shall be labeled with the IDF number, patch panel number, and sequential port number.
1. A floor plan clearly labeled with all outlet jack numbers shall be included in the as- built plans. 2. All labels shall correspond to as-built drawings and to final test reports. 3. Each fiber will be identified at the MDF and/or IDF with:
a. Fiber number. b. IDF number. c. MDF port number. d. IDF port number.
B. All field testing will be done with a Microtest PentaScanner or verified comparable TDR for UTP cable, and Laser Precision (or equivalent) OTDR for fiber optic cable. Each cable
PAGE 7 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART AND ARCHITECTURE 27 00 00 DATA/TELEPHONE CABLING
segment shall be verified to pass all specifications for installation and performance as specified by the cable and connector manufacturers.
Final system acceptance will not occur prior to delivery of test results in a printed format provided by the TDR and OTDR. Contractor will provide documentation to ensure that all fiber and UTP test results are within acceptable tolerances provided by cable and connector manufacturers published standards and performance specifications. For all fiber runs, test documentation submitted will include continuity, attenuation, and length of each installed fiber strand. All UTP and fiber cables will be tested from end to end.
C. As-Builts: Contractor shall be responsible for marking-up, manually red-lined, district provided infrastructure and building plans. These as-builts shall clearly indicate detailed inter-building fiber and copper cabling routes, fiber strand and copper pairs counts, termination locations, and voice/data station locations including numerical station/drop designations. Receipt and acceptance of as-built drawings by the district is a prerequisite prior to authorization of final payment.
END OF SECTION 27 00 00
I:\14\214415 SJCC B200\SPECS\Electrical\27 00 00.doc
PAGE 8 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
SECTION 32 31 13 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Chain-link fences. 2. Gates: swing. 3. Padlocks.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete post footings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Chain-link fence and gate framework shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to sheet S1.0, ASCE/SEI 7, and 2013 CBC.
B. Lightning Protection System: Maximum grounding-resistance value of 25 ohms under normal dry conditions.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link fences and gates.
1. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings. 2. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. 3. Gates and hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show accessories, hardware, gate operation, and operational clearances.
PAGE 1 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence, and gate, from manufacturer.
B. Product Test Reports: For framing strength according to ASTM F 1043.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:
1. Gate hardware.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Emergency Access Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for gates with automatic gate operators serving as a required means of access.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to provide labor and materials to repair or replace components of chain-link fences and gates that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of gate operators and controls. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PAGE 2 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with CLFMI Product Manual and with requirements indicated below:
1. Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Steel Wire Fabric: 9 gauge wire.
a. Mesh Size: 2 inch . b. Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 2, 2.0 oz./sq. ft. with zinc coating applied before weaving. c. Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated before the weaving process with manufacturer's standard clear protective coating.
3. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
2.2 FENCE FRAMING
A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces, and line; terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness according to ASTM F 1043 based on the following:
1. Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Heavy Industrial Strength: Material Group IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40.
a. Line Post: 2.375 inches in diameter. b. End, Corner and Pull Post: 2.375 inches in diameter.
3. Horizontal Framework Members: Intermediate, top and bottom rails complying with ASTM F 1043.
a. Intermediate Rail: 1.66 inches in diameter. b. Top Rail: 1.66 inches in diameter. c. Bottom Rail: 1.66 inches in diameter.
4. Metallic Coating for Steel Framing:
a. Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. average zinc coating per ASTM A 123/A 123M or 4.0-oz./sq. ft. zinc coating per ASTM A 653/A 653M.
2.3 SWING GATES
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts and single swing gate types.
PAGE 3 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
1. Gate Leaf Width: As indicated. 2. Gate Fabric Height: As indicated.
B. Pipe and Tubing:
1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective coating and finish to match fence framing. 2. Gate Posts: Round tubular steel. 3. Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel.
C. Frame Corner Construction: Welded.
D. Hardware:
1. Hinges: 180-degree outward swing. 2. Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, with provision for padlocking accessible from both sides of gate at non-egress gates. 3. Panic Device: Von Duprin 99 Series. 4. Closer: LCN 4041.
2.4 FITTINGS
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
B. Post Caps: Provide for each post.
C. Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post.
D. Rail Fittings: Provide the following:
1. Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6 inches long. 2. Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting intermediate and bottom rails in the fence line-to-line posts.
E. Tension Bars: Steel, length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post.
F. Truss Rod Assemblies: Steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading rod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment.
G. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626.
1. Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the following:
a. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 0.148-inch- diameter wire.
H. Finish:
1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. zinc.
PAGE 4 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
2.5 FENCE GROUNDING
A. General: Provide fence grounding where required by the CBC.
B. Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger.
1. Material above Finished Grade: Copper. 2. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper. 3. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.
C. Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467.
1. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel, 5/8 by 96 inches .
2.6 PADLOCKS
A. Contractor to provide four (4) MASTER PROSERIES 7047 padlocks to Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements indicated.
PAGE 5 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
3.4 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION
A. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil.
B. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. 2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
a. Concealed Concrete: Top 2 inches below gradeto allow covering with surface material.
C. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 30 degrees or more.
D. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at as indicated on Drawings.
E. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Diagonally brace terminal posts to adjacent line posts with truss rods and turnbuckles. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts.
1. Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric 72 inches or higher, on fences with top rail and at two-third fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension.
Retain first paragraph below if applicable.
F. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer.
G. Intermediate and Bottom Rails: Install and secure to posts with fittings.
H. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 2 inches between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.
I. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches o.c.
J. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing.
PAGE 6 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches o.c. and to braces at 24 inches o.c.
K. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts.
3.5 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper- resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
3.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1500 feet except as follows:
1. Fences within 100 Feet of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at maximum intervals of 750 feet .
a. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening.
1) Bond metal gates to gate posts. 2) Bond across openings, with and without gates, except openings indicated as intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least 18 inches below finished grade.
B. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet on each side of crossing.
C. Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by IEEE C2 unless otherwise indicated.
D. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6 inches (150 mm) below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location.
E. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame.
F. Connections: Make connections to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
PAGE 7 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015 ARTIK ART & ARCHITECTURE 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
END OF SECTION 32 31 13
PAGE 8 Addendum # 1 May 04, 2015